{"title":"Boissons","description":"\u003ch2\u003eDécouvrez notre collection de boissons\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eNotre collection de boissons offre une grande variété de breuvages pour étancher votre soif et satisfaire vos papilles.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eQue vous recherchiez un verre d'eau rafraîchissant, une tasse de café chaud ou une bière fraîche, vous êtes sûr de trouver quelque chose à votre goût.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eCette collection comprend des options quotidiennes et des choix savoureux pour différents goûts et occasions. Il est facile de parcourir les boissons pour le matin, les repas ou les soirées tranquilles à la maison.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eParcourez les choix qui s'accordent bien avec les repas, les pauses ou les moments de détente à la maison. Certains acheteurs peuvent préférer les produits de base simples, tandis que d'autres peuvent vouloir des saveurs audacieuses et rafraîchissantes.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eVous pourriez également trouver des favoris comme la limonade ou la bière sans alcool parmi la sélection. Ces options conviennent aux réunions informelles, aux déjeuners rapides ou aux petits moments de rafraîchissement.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eNotre sélection facilite l'exploration des boissons qui correspondent à vos préférences. Utilisez cette collection pour comparer les choix familiers et découvrir de nouvelles options pour différentes humeurs et routines.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eDes choix légers aux saveurs plus riches, il y en a pour de nombreuses préférences. La gamme est conçue pour vous aider à faire vos achats en toute simplicité et à trouver les boissons qui correspondent à votre journée.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"polar-seltzer-variety-special-cranberry-lime-mandarin-ruby-red-grapefruit","title":"Polar Seltzer Variety Special","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Seltzer Variety Special is an assorted pack of Polar Seltzer 12 fl oz (355 mL) cans in four flavors, Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime, with zero calories, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium. It is sold as one variety pack, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Seltzer Variety Pack: Zero-Calorie Sparkling Water in Four Citrus Flavors\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour flavors in one pack\u003c\/strong\u003e — Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sweeteners, zero sodium\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water and natural flavors only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar or artificial ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean, crisp seltzer without aftertaste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in Worcester, Massachusetts\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by Polar Beverages, a family company since 1882\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) aluminum cans\u003c\/strong\u003e — fridge-friendly slim cans\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKosher and gluten-free\u003c\/strong\u003e — suitable for most diets, with nothing to count\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the cans and drink them straight, or pour over ice with a wedge of the matching fruit. Cranberry Lime and Ruby Red Grapefruit make good mixers for vodka and gin, and Lime brightens a glass of iced tea. Store unopened cans in a cool, dry place away from sunlight; for the best fizz, refrigerate for at least two hours before opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar Seltzer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages has been bottling in Worcester, Massachusetts, since 1882 and is still run by the founding Crowley family, making it the largest independent soft drink bottler in the United States. Polar Seltzer, its flagship, comes in dozens of natural flavors and a rotating seasonal line. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarseltzer.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarseltzer.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Seltzer contain allergens, sugar, or sweeteners?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Every Polar Seltzer flavor contains only carbonated water and natural flavors, with zero calories, zero sugar, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium, and the cans are labeled kosher and gluten-free. No major allergens are declared. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the can before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Polar Seltzer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold, straight from the can or over ice with a slice of citrus. Keep unopened cans in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, and refrigerate for at least two hours before opening for the sharpest carbonation. Once opened, finish the can the same day, since the bubbles fade within hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich flavors are in the Polar Seltzer Variety Special?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe pack pictured includes four Polar Seltzer flavors: Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime. Grapefruit and Cranberry Lime lean tart, Mandarin is the sweetest-tasting despite having no sugar, and Lime is the crispest. The exact mix in a pack may vary with availability, so check the pack label.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Seltzer made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePolar Seltzer is made in Worcester, Massachusetts, by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in 1882. The seltzer has been a New England staple for decades and is now sold across the United States. This variety pack lets you try four of the most popular citrus flavors in one order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Seltzer contain allergens, sugar, or sweeteners?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Every Polar Seltzer flavor contains only carbonated water and natural flavors, with zero calories, zero sugar, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium, and the cans are labeled kosher and gluten-free. No major allergens are declared. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the can before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Polar Seltzer?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it cold, straight from the can or over ice with a slice of citrus. Keep unopened cans in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, and refrigerate for at least two hours before opening for the sharpest carbonation. Once opened, finish the can the same day, since the bubbles fade within hours.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Which flavors are in the Polar Seltzer Variety Special?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The pack pictured includes four Polar Seltzer flavors: Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime. Grapefruit and Cranberry Lime lean tart, Mandarin is the sweetest-tasting despite having no sugar, and Lime is the crispest. The exact mix in a pack may vary with availability, so check the pack label.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Seltzer made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Polar Seltzer is made in Worcester, Massachusetts, by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in 1882. The seltzer has been a New England staple for decades and is now sold across the United States. This variety pack lets you try four of the most popular citrus flavors in one order.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42627996844223,"sku":"2359_4.00_24.89- LOCAL","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/81GygmyrEhL.jpg?v=1777318881"},{"product_id":"poland-spring-mini-water-bottles-8-oz","title":"Poland Spring Mini Water Bottles, 8 fl oz – Natural Spring Water","description":"\u003cp\u003ePoland Spring Mini Water Bottles are 8 fl oz (237 mL) bottles of still, 100 percent natural spring water sourced from springs in Maine, sized for lunchboxes, kids' parties, meetings, and small coolers. Choose a single bottle or a Pack of 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePoland Spring 8 oz Mini Bottles: Natural Spring Water for Lunches and Parties\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent natural spring water\u003c\/strong\u003e — still, unflavored spring water with naturally occurring electrolytes and one ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 fl oz (237 mL) mini size\u003c\/strong\u003e — half the size of a standard bottle, so kids and guests finish it without waste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sweeteners\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain water with nothing added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSourced in Maine\u003c\/strong\u003e — Poland Spring draws from a group of springs in Maine and bottles it there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight plastic bottle; cap and label recyclability vary by local program\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single bottle or Pack of 12 for lunch rotation, offices, and events\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles and drop one into a lunch bag, cooler, or diaper bag; the 8 oz size also suits meeting tables, waiting rooms, and kids' sports. It is plain still spring water, so it can be used for mixing infant formula or juice concentrate where your pediatrician or the product label allows. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap, refrigerate, and finish within a day or two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Poland Spring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePoland Spring takes its name from the town of Poland, Maine, where the original spring was first bottled in 1845 and the Poland Spring House resort drew visitors through the 1800s. Today the brand draws from several springs across Maine and is one of the best-selling bottled spring waters in the northeastern United States. It is owned by Primo Brands, the company formed from BlueTriton and Primo Water. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polandspring.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolandspring.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Poland Spring mini water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Poland Spring Natural Spring Water has one ingredient, spring water, with no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. It has zero calories and naturally occurring electrolytes only. As with any packaged beverage, read the printed label on the bottle or case for the current water quality and ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Poland Spring 8 oz bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaning products. Serve chilled; it is still water, so it will not fizz. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) size is meant to be finished in one sitting, but if you recap a bottle, refrigerate it and drink it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 8 oz mini and the standard 16.9 oz Poland Spring bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe water is identical natural spring water from Maine. The mini holds 8 fl oz (237 mL), less than half the standard 16.9 fl oz bottle, so it fits lunch bags and small hands and avoids half-finished bottles at parties and meetings. The standard bottle is the better choice for a gym bag, a car ride, or all-day hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does Poland Spring water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePoland Spring is sourced from a group of natural springs in Maine and bottled there, making it a US product rather than an import. The brand began at the original spring in Poland, Maine, in 1845. This 8 fl oz mini bottle is the standard US retail size, sold here as a single or in a Pack of 12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Poland Spring mini water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Poland Spring Natural Spring Water has one ingredient, spring water, with no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. It has zero calories and naturally occurring electrolytes only. As with any packaged beverage, read the printed label on the bottle or case for the current water quality and ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve Poland Spring 8 oz bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaning products. Serve chilled; it is still water, so it will not fizz. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) size is meant to be finished in one sitting, but if you recap a bottle, refrigerate it and drink it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 8 oz mini and the standard 16.9 oz Poland Spring bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The water is identical natural spring water from Maine. The mini holds 8 fl oz (237 mL), less than half the standard 16.9 fl oz bottle, so it fits lunch bags and small hands and avoids half-finished bottles at parties and meetings. The standard bottle is the better choice for a gym bag, a car ride, or all-day hydration.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does Poland Spring water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Poland Spring is sourced from a group of natural springs in Maine and bottled there, making it a US product rather than an import. The brand began at the original spring in Poland, Maine, in 1845. This 8 fl oz mini bottle is the standard US retail size, sold here as a single or in a Pack of 12.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Poland Spring","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45865679454399,"sku":"POLAND-SPRING-8OZ-1","price":1.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":42576476176575,"sku":"POLAND-SPRING-8OZ-12","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/poland-spring-mini-water-8oz-single.png?v=1784296666"},{"product_id":"nestle-pure-life-purified-water-8oz-pack-of-15","title":"Nestlé Pure Life Purified Water, 8 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 15 (120 fl oz Total)","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life Purified Water 8 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 15, is a case of fifteen 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottles, 120 fl oz in total, of purified drinking water with a light blend of minerals added for taste. The small bottle size suits kids' lunchboxes, sports bags, and party coolers, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eNestle Pure Life 8 oz Mini Bottles: Kid-Size Purified Water for Lunchboxes and Events\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePurified water with minerals for taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — water is filtered through a multi-step purification process, then a small amount of minerals is added for a clean, neutral taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a single-serve size that fits a child's hand and lunchbox and is finished before it goes warm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack of 15 bottles\u003c\/strong\u003e — 120 fl oz per case, enough for a week of school lunches or one party cooler\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable PET bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight clear plastic with a twist cap that reseals between sips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain still water with nothing added except trace minerals for taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBottled in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced at regional bottling plants for the North American market\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours before serving; the 8 oz size cools quickly in a cooler with ice. Pack one per lunchbox, hand them out at soccer games and birthday parties, or keep a few in the car for short trips. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaners or gasoline, and use by the date printed on the cap. Once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nestle Pure Life\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life launched in 1998 and grew into one of the most widely sold bottled water brands in the world, with a focus on affordable family hydration. In North America the brand is now bottled and distributed under license by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, at regional plants across the United States. The Nestle name still appears on the label. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nestle.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enestle.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nestle Pure Life 8 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 8 oz and 16.9 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth hold the same purified water. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children, small hands, and short outings, and comes 15 to a case. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case. Choose the mini for lunchboxes and parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Nestle Pure Life 8 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 8 oz and 16.9 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both hold the same purified water. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children, small hands, and short outings, and comes 15 to a case. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case. Choose the mini for lunchboxes and parties.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Nestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Nestle","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42422619406527,"sku":"NESTLE-PURELIFE-8OZ-15PK","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/71mmrb4EfIL_fbd85f4c-0e61-46f8-aaf5-e29bf97d89cd.jpg?v=1777319519"},{"product_id":"nestle-water-pure-life-purified-water-16-9-fl-oz-bottle-pack-of-10-total","title":"Nestle Water, Pure Life, Purified Water, 16.9 Fl Oz Bottle (Pack of 10, Total of 169 Fl Oz)","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life Purified Water 16.9 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 10, is a case of ten standard 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottles, 169 fl oz in total, of purified drinking water with a light blend of minerals added for taste. It is the everyday single-serve size for work, school, the gym, and the car, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eNestle Pure Life 16.9 oz Bottles: Everyday Purified Water in a 10-Pack\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePurified water with minerals for taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — water is filtered through a multi-step purification process, then a small amount of minerals is added for a clean, neutral taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard single-serve size that fits car cup holders, gym bags, and desk drawers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack of 10 bottles\u003c\/strong\u003e — 169 fl oz per case, a convenient count for a small household or office fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable PET bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight clear plastic with a twist cap that reseals between sips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain still water with nothing added except trace minerals for taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBottled in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced at regional bottling plants for the North American market\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill a few bottles in the refrigerator and keep the rest of the case in the pantry. Grab one for the commute, the gym, or a desk drawer; the resealable cap makes it easy to sip through the day. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaners or gasoline, and use by the date printed on the cap. Once opened, drink within a day or refrigerate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nestle Pure Life\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life launched in 1998 and grew into one of the most widely sold bottled water brands in the world, with a focus on affordable family hydration. In North America the brand is now bottled and distributed under license by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, at regional plants across the United States. The Nestle name still appears on the label. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nestle.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enestle.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nestle Pure Life 16.9 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 16.9 oz and 8 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth hold the same purified water. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case, 169 fl oz total. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children and short outings and comes 15 to a case. Choose this size for daily hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Nestle Pure Life 16.9 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 16.9 oz and 8 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both hold the same purified water. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case, 169 fl oz total. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children and short outings and comes 15 to a case. Choose this size for daily hydration.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Nestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Nestle","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42422619537599,"sku":"1.5_332_20181127","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/61GauXbtvWL.png?v=1777324214"},{"product_id":"mesh-wild-berry-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-c","title":"Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is a no-mess herbal tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.54 oz \/ 72 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped wild berry herbal tea sticks per box (2.54 oz \/ 72 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWild berry herbal blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps the berry blend contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Wild Berry stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The wild berry herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Wild Berry stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the berry blend to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the wild berry blend evenly, producing a consistent fruity brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its wild berry herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The wild berry herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Wild Berry stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the berry blend to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the wild berry blend evenly, producing a consistent fruity brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its wild berry herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825700593855,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825700626623,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825700659391,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/71TbS_h6MnL.png?v=1777323698"},{"product_id":"mesh-vanilla-rooibos-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artific-1","title":"Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is a no-mess herbal tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.89 oz \/ 82 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer. Naturally caffeine-free.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped vanilla rooibos herbal tea sticks per box (2.89 oz \/ 82 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNaturally caffeine-free rooibos with vanilla, sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps the rooibos blend contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Vanilla Rooibos stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The vanilla rooibos blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. Rooibos is naturally caffeine-free. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Vanilla Rooibos stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the rooibos to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Rooibos is naturally caffeine-free, making this a great option for those looking to reduce caffeine intake or enjoy a relaxing cup in the evening without affecting sleep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its rooibos from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The vanilla rooibos blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. Rooibos is naturally caffeine-free. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Vanilla Rooibos stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the rooibos to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Rooibos is naturally caffeine-free, making Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea a great option for those looking to reduce caffeine intake or enjoy a relaxing cup in the evening without affecting sleep.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its rooibos from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825698300095,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825698332863,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825698365631,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/61Nk_yLZYzS_44d0d1de-562d-4000-bd46-94fe839a7a0f.png?v=1778963442"},{"product_id":"mesh-turkish-apple-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificia-1","title":"Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is a no-mess herbal tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.4 oz \/ 68 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped Turkish apple herbal tea sticks per box (2.4 oz \/ 68 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eTurkish apple herbal blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps the herbal blend contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Turkish Apple stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The Turkish apple herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Turkish Apple stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the apple herbal blend evenly, producing a consistent brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its Turkish apple herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The Turkish apple herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Turkish Apple stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the apple herbal blend evenly, producing a consistent brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its Turkish apple herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825692958911,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825692991679,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825693024447,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51aWVpzqmML_af37ae61-2976-436c-a643-56339d6773e6.png?v=1777324998"},{"product_id":"mesh-thyme-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors-1","title":"Mesh Thyme Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea is a no-mess herbal tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (1.87 oz \/ 53 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped thyme herbal tea sticks per box (1.87 oz \/ 53 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eThyme herbal blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps thyme contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Thyme stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The thyme herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Thyme stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the thyme to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Thyme Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the thyme evenly, producing a consistent herbal brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Thyme Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its thyme from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The thyme herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Thyme Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Thyme stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the thyme to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Thyme Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the thyme evenly, producing a consistent herbal brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Thyme Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its thyme from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825682145471,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825682178239,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825682211007,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51BMh3BLQhL_0e940a1a-2395-4897-97d5-47c6d3f928db.png?v=1777325195"},{"product_id":"mesh-pomegranate-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-1","title":"Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is a no-mess herbal tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.47 oz \/ 70 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped pomegranate herbal tea sticks per box (2.47 oz \/ 70 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePomegranate herbal blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps tea grains contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Pomegranate stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The pomegranate herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Pomegranate stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent pomegranate brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its pomegranate herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The pomegranate herbal blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Pomegranate stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea different from regular herbal tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent pomegranate brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its pomegranate herbal blend from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825678901439,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825678934207,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825678966975,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51i_W0ZfesL_e2fe28c9-ed66-4961-887e-1de34d54003d.png?v=1777323710"},{"product_id":"mesh-green-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors","title":"Mesh Green Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Green Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea is a no-mess green tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.47 oz \/ 70 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Green Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped green tea sticks per box (2.47 oz \/ 70 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGreen tea blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps tea grains contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Green Tea stick into a cup of hot water at around 175°F \/ 80°C — avoid fully boiling water to preserve the delicate flavor of green tea. Stir gently for 2 to 4 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Green Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Green Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The green tea blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Green Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea contains only green tea. It is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Green Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Green Tea stick into a cup of hot water at around 175°F \/ 80°C and stir gently for 2 to 4 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Green Stick Tea different from regular green tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent green tea brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Green Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its green tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Green Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Green Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The green tea blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Green Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Green Stick Tea contains only green tea. It is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Green Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Green Tea stick into a cup of hot water (around 175°F \/ 80°C — avoid boiling to preserve the delicate flavor) and stir gently for 2 to 4 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Green Stick Tea different from regular green tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent green tea brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Green Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its green tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825667629247,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825667662015,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825667694783,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/518YPsCClzL.png?v=1777325144"},{"product_id":"mesh-earl-grey-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-co-1","title":"Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Earl Grey","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is a no-mess Earl Grey in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.54 oz \/ 72 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Earl Grey\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped Earl Grey tea sticks per box (2.54 oz \/ 72 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eEarl Grey blend with natural bergamot, sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps tea grains contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Earl Grey stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The Earl Grey blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contains black tea and natural bergamot flavoring. It is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Earl Grey stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea different from regular tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent Earl Grey brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its Earl Grey tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The Earl Grey blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contains black tea and natural bergamot flavoring. It is free from gluten and dairy. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Earl Grey stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea different from regular tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent Earl Grey brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its Earl Grey tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825665663167,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825665695935,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825665728703,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51D96DiYP3L_ada18e22-4a07-43eb-8685-8f8899ad92e4.png?v=1777324411"},{"product_id":"mesh-cold-coffee-16-sticks-coffee-enjoyment-made-easy-no-bag-no-drips-no-s","title":"Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Cold Coffee","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks are a no-mess cold coffee solution in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.82 oz \/ 80 g) that brew directly in cold or iced water without a bag, filter, or extra equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Cold Coffee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped cold coffee sticks per box (2.82 oz \/ 80 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in cold or iced water, no bag needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCoffee blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps coffee grounds contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Cold Coffee stick into a glass of cold or iced water. Stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no filter or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed coffee and tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at home. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the depth of properly brewed coffee in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its coffee and tea blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Cold Coffee contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The coffee blend is curated by Mesh's in-house experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Cold Coffee contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain only coffee. They are free from gluten and dairy. However, they are processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh Cold Coffee stick into a glass of cold or iced water and stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the coffee to infuse directly into the water — no bag, no drips, and no extra equipment needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks different from instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike instant coffee, Mesh sticks use real ground coffee held in a mesh filter. The coffee infuses through the mesh holes as you stir, producing a smooth cold brew-style cup without dissolving powder or leaving residue in your drink.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Cold Coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its coffee from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more beverages and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Cold Coffee contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The coffee blend is curated by Mesh's in-house experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Cold Coffee contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain only coffee. They are free from gluten and dairy. However, they are processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I use Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh Cold Coffee stick into a glass of cold or iced water and stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes. The mesh brewing holes allow the coffee to infuse directly into the water — no bag, no drips, and no extra equipment needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks different from instant coffee?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike instant coffee, Mesh sticks use real ground coffee held in a mesh filter. The coffee infuses through the mesh holes as you stir, producing a smooth cold brew-style cup without dissolving powder or leaving residue in your drink.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Cold Coffee made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its coffee from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and individually wrapped to preserve freshness until use.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825651835071,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825651867839,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825651900607,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/61uJ2g5emWS.jpg?v=1777319913"},{"product_id":"mesh-black-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors","title":"Mesh Black Stick Tea | 16 Sticks | Brew-in-Cup Black Tea","description":"\n\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea is a no-mess black tea in a patented stick format — each box contains 16 individually wrapped sticks (2.4 oz \/ 68 g) that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea 16-Count – Brew-in-Cup Black Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e16 individually wrapped black tea sticks per box (2.4 oz \/ 68 g total)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging with built-in brewing holes — stir directly in hot water, no spoon needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eBlack tea blend sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCompact stick format fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eNo drips, no mess — the mesh filter keeps tea grains contained throughout brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh black tea stick into a cup of freshly boiled water. Stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting brew time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors. Best enjoyed hot, though it can also be brewed and chilled over ice. Note: expiration dates on packaging follow the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea should be accessible anywhere, not just at the breakfast table. The brand developed its patented stick-and-mesh format to deliver the aroma and depth of properly brewed tea in a portable, spill-free package. Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them to consistent flavor profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Black Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Mesh Black Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The black tea blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Black Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea contains only black tea. It is free from gluten, dairy, and artificial additives. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Black Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one Mesh black tea stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Black Stick Tea different from regular tea bags?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUnlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent brew without drips or mess.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Mesh Black Stick Tea made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Stick Tea sources its black tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and packaged to preserve freshness in each individually wrapped unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more teas and pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Black Stick Tea contain any artificial colors or flavors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Mesh Black Stick Tea contains no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives. The black tea blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world, with no additives of any kind.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Mesh Black Stick Tea contain allergens such as gluten or dairy?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Black Stick Tea contains only black tea. It is free from gluten, dairy, and artificial additives. However, it is processed in a facility that may handle other products, so those with severe allergies should check the packaging for the most current information.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I brew Mesh Black Stick Tea?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Place one Mesh black tea stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes depending on your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes allow the tea to infuse directly — no spoon, no strainer, and no drips needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What makes Mesh Black Stick Tea different from regular tea bags?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Unlike traditional tea bags, Mesh sticks are designed to be stirred directly in the cup like a spoon. The mesh brewing holes allow hot water to pass through the tea grains evenly, producing a consistent brew without drips or mess.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where is Mesh Black Stick Tea made?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mesh Stick Tea sources its black tea leaves from farms across multiple growing regions worldwide. The sticks are manufactured by Mesh Stick and packaged to preserve freshness in each individually wrapped unit.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":42429185982655,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825644822719,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825644855487,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51lh_bxPIsL.png?v=1777323835"},{"product_id":"almdudler-original-austrian-herbal-soda-330ml-can","title":"Almdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda, 11.2 fl oz Can (330ml)","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda 11.2 fl oz can (330ml) — Austria's national drink since 1957, made with a secret blend of natural alpine herbs, lightly carbonated, with no artificial flavors or colors. Imported directly from Austria. Available in Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAlmdudler Original 11.2 fl oz – Natural Alpine Herbal Soda, Austria's Favorite Since 1957\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAustria's National Drink Since 1957\u003c\/strong\u003e — over 65 years of heritage, the most beloved soft drink in Austria, enjoyed by generations\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural Alpine Herbs\u003c\/strong\u003e — made with a secret blend of natural alpine herbs — no artificial flavors, no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly Carbonated\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentle sparkle that enhances the herbal flavor without overpowering it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e11.2 fl oz Slim Can (330ml)\u003c\/strong\u003e — convenient, portable format — perfect for on-the-go, picnics, events, and entertaining\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Austria\u003c\/strong\u003e — authentic European quality, not available in most US grocery stores\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe Almdudler well chilled for the best taste. Enjoy straight from the can over ice, or pour into a glass. For the classic Austrian Almdudler Spritzer, mix 50\/50 with a dry white wine — Austria's favorite summer drink. Also great mixed with sparkling water for a lighter option, or as a cocktail mixer with gin, vodka, or elderflower liquéur. Store unopened cans at room temperature; refrigerate after opening and consume within 24 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Almdudler\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler was created in 1957 by Erwin Klein in Vienna, Austria — inspired by the alpine herb lemonades traditionally enjoyed in the Austrian mountains. The name combines \"Alm\" (alpine meadow) and \"dudeln\" (to yodel), a playful nod to Austrian mountain culture. Today, Almdudler is Austria's most beloved soft drink, exported to over 40 countries and cherished by Austrians at home and abroad.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eWhat does Almdudler taste like?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eAlmdudler Original has a unique, mildly sweet herbal flavor with light carbonation — crisp, refreshing, and unlike any other soda. The secret blend of alpine herbs gives it a distinctive taste that is simultaneously nostalgic for Austrians and excitingly new for first-time drinkers.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eIs Almdudler made with artificial flavors or colors?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNo. Almdudler Original is made with natural alpine herb flavoring and contains no artificial colors or artificial flavors — it is naturally flavored with the brand's secret blend of alpine herbs.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eHow do Austrians traditionally drink Almdudler?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eIce cold, straight from the can is the classic way. The Almdudler Spritzer — mixed 50\/50 with dry white wine — is Austria's favorite summer drink. It also pairs well with gin, vodka, or elderflower liquéur as a cocktail mixer, or mixed with sparkling water for a lighter option.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExplore more imported beverages in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/beverages\"\u003eBeverages collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.almdudler.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003ealmdudler.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Almdudler taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Almdudler Original has a unique, mildly sweet herbal flavor with light carbonation — crisp, refreshing, and unlike any other soda. The secret blend of alpine herbs gives it a distinctive taste that is simultaneously nostalgic for Austrians and excitingly new for first-time drinkers.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Almdudler made with artificial flavors or colors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No. Almdudler Original is made with natural alpine herb flavoring and contains no artificial colors or artificial flavors — it is naturally flavored with the brand's secret blend of alpine herbs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do Austrians traditionally drink Almdudler?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Ice cold, straight from the can is the classic way. The Almdudler Spritzer — mixed 50\/50 with dry white wine — is Austria's favorite summer drink. It also pairs well with gin, vodka, or elderflower liquéur as a cocktail mixer, or mixed with sparkling water for a lighter option.\"}}]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Almdudler","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45621369077951,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45621369110719,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK3","price":13.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45621369143487,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK6","price":27.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45906778226879,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK12","price":53.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_c214fb9f-d172-4a3a-a3bc-fa005a83e893.png?v=1778970577"},{"product_id":"mesh-peppermint-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-c-1","title":"Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea | 16 Sticks | Premium Instant Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a box of 16 single-serve brew-in-cup sticks, each holding real peppermint leaf inside a perforated stick that steeps directly in hot water with no teabag, strainer, or spoon. It is available as a single box (16 sticks), a Pack of 3 (48 sticks), or a Pack of 6 (96 sticks), shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea: Single-Serve Peppermint Sticks That Steep in the Cup\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrew-in-cup stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — a perforated stick holds the peppermint inside; drop it in hot water, stir, and lift it out with no drips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal peppermint\u003c\/strong\u003e — clean, cooling peppermint flavor with no artificial colors or flavors, per the box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — individually wrapped sticks stay fresh and travel well in a bag, desk drawer, or glove box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo equipment needed\u003c\/strong\u003e — no teapot, infuser, or strainer; the stick works as its own stirrer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeine-free herbal infusion\u003c\/strong\u003e — peppermint leaf is naturally caffeine-free, so it suits evenings; confirm on the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single box (16 sticks), Pack of 3 (48 sticks), or Pack of 6 (96 sticks)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one stick in a cup, pour in about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water just off the boil, and stir gently for a few seconds. Let it steep three to five minutes, stirring once or twice, then lift the stick out and discard it. Add honey or a slice of lemon if you like; it also works chilled over ice as a summer peppermint tea. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard away from strong odors, and keep unused sticks in their wrappers until you brew.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh is a specialty tea brand built around its patented stick format, a single-serve perforated stick that replaces the teabag and infuser. The company produces black, green, fruit, and herbal varieties, and peppermint is one of its most popular herbal sticks. Mesh sticks are sold in cafes, hotels, and grocery stores in Europe, the Middle East, and North America. Browse more loose-leaf and bagged teas in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a herbal infusion made from peppermint leaf and does not list milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or other major allergens among its ingredients. The stick itself is food-grade and inert. Because packaging and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the box before brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDrop one stick into a cup, add about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water, and stir for a few seconds. Steep three to five minutes, stirring once more, then lift the stick out and discard it. No teabag or strainer is needed. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard and keep unused sticks wrapped until you brew.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Mesh Stick Tea and a regular teabag?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eA Mesh stick is a rigid perforated tube that holds the leaf, so it doubles as a stirrer and lifts out cleanly without dripping or squeezing. Teabags float, need a spoon, and often leave a soggy bag to deal with. The stick format also gives the water more contact with the leaf, so peppermint flavor comes through quickly and clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sizes and pack options are available for Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach box of Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea holds 16 individually wrapped sticks. You can order a single box for 16 sticks, a Pack of 3 for 48 sticks, or a Pack of 6 for 96 sticks. Multi-packs are the practical choice for offices, waiting rooms, or households that drink peppermint tea every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a herbal infusion made from peppermint leaf and does not list milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or other major allergens among its ingredients. The stick itself is food-grade and inert. Because packaging and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the box before brewing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I use Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Drop one stick into a cup, add about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water, and stir for a few seconds. Steep three to five minutes, stirring once more, then lift the stick out and discard it. No teabag or strainer is needed. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard and keep unused sticks wrapped until you brew.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Mesh Stick Tea and a regular teabag?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"A Mesh stick is a rigid perforated tube that holds the leaf, so it doubles as a stirrer and lifts out cleanly without dripping or squeezing. Teabags float, need a spoon, and often leave a soggy bag to deal with. The stick format also gives the water more contact with the leaf, so peppermint flavor comes through quickly and clearly.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What sizes and pack options are available for Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Each box of Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea holds 16 individually wrapped sticks. You can order a single box for 16 sticks, a Pack of 3 for 48 sticks, or a Pack of 6 for 96 sticks. Multi-packs are the practical choice for offices, waiting rooms, or households that drink peppermint tea every day.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825622671551,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825622704319,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825622737087,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/513bYM6p0pL_3082eb9c-945f-492b-a0ce-e138b5a77e32.png?v=1778963489"},{"product_id":"lorina-sparkling-lemonade-prestige-750ml-gluten-free-since-1895","title":"Lorina Sparkling Lemonade Naturally Flavored Sparkling Soda, 25.4 fl oz (750mL), Prestige Collection, Gluten-Free, Since 1895","description":"\u003cp\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade is a 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top glass bottle of naturally flavored French sparkling lemonade from the Prestige Collection, made in France by a lemonade house founded in 1895, gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors. It is the genuine imported bottle, available as a single or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade 750 mL: French Swing-Top Lemonade Since 1895\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally flavored lemon\u003c\/strong\u003e — bright, crisp lemon with fine carbonation and no artificial colors or flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrestige Collection\u003c\/strong\u003e — Lorina's premium line, the one served in French cafes and sold at delis and specialty grocers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSwing-top glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the reusable flip-top glass bottle with a rubber gasket that reseals to hold the fizz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGluten-free\u003c\/strong\u003e — labeled gluten-free, per the bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e25.4 fl oz (750 mL)\u003c\/strong\u003e — the table size, enough for four to six glasses at dinner or brunch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for dinner parties, gifts, and stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle well, flip the swing-top open, and pour over ice with a slice of lemon or a sprig of mint; it also works as a mixer with gin, vodka, or sparkling wine for a French 75-style cocktail. Reseal the swing-top between pours to keep the carbonation. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, refrigerate with the top clamped shut and finish within two to three days. The empty bottle can be washed and reused for water, homemade lemonade, or infused oils.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Lorina\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLorina was founded in 1895 by Victor Geyer in Munster, in the Alsace region of France, and became known across the country for its artisan lemonades in the traditional swing-top bottle. The company still produces its sodas in France and exports them widely, with the Prestige Collection covering flavors from classic lemon to blood orange and pink lemonade. The glass bottle with its wire-bail closure has become the brand's signature. Browse more imported sodas and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.lorina.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003elorina.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Lorina Sparkling Lemonade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade is a naturally flavored carbonated soft drink, labeled gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors, and its ingredients do not include milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg. Because European recipes and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Lorina Sparkling Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled over ice with a slice of lemon, or use it as a mixer for cocktails and spritzes. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, clamp the swing-top shut, refrigerate, and finish within two to three days while the fizz lasts. The bottle can be washed and reused.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Lorina Sparkling Lemonade and American lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eLorina is a French limonade, a clear carbonated soft drink with a light, crisp lemon flavor and fine bubbles, closer to a premium lemon soda than to the cloudy, still, fresh-squeezed lemonade common in the United States. It is naturally flavored with no artificial colors, and the 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top bottle is meant for the table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Lorina Sparkling Lemonade imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Lorina is made in France by the lemonade house founded in 1895 and this is the original 750 mL swing-top glass bottle from the Prestige Collection, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade sold in French cafes and grocers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Lorina Sparkling Lemonade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Lorina Sparkling Lemonade is a naturally flavored carbonated soft drink, labeled gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors, and its ingredients do not include milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg. Because European recipes and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Lorina Sparkling Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it well chilled over ice with a slice of lemon, or use it as a mixer for cocktails and spritzes. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, clamp the swing-top shut, refrigerate, and finish within two to three days while the fizz lasts. The bottle can be washed and reused.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Lorina Sparkling Lemonade and American lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Lorina is a French limonade, a clear carbonated soft drink with a light, crisp lemon flavor and fine bubbles, closer to a premium lemon soda than to the cloudy, still, fresh-squeezed lemonade common in the United States. It is naturally flavored with no artificial colors, and the 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top bottle is meant for the table.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Lorina Sparkling Lemonade imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Lorina is made in France by the lemonade house founded in 1895 and this is the original 750 mL swing-top glass bottle from the Prestige Collection, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade sold in French cafes and grocers.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lorina","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45646393540799,"sku":"LORINA-LEMONADE750-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45646393573567,"sku":"LORINA-LEMONADE750-PACK3","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45670664503487,"sku":"LORINA-SPARKLING-LEMONADE-254FLOZ-PACK6","price":37.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/lorlem1.webp?v=1779549133"},{"product_id":"muhlhauser-waldmeister-syrup-650ml","title":"Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup 500ml — German Woodruff Syrup","description":"\u003cp\u003eMühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup is a 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) glass bottle of concentrated German woodruff syrup, the sweet, herbal, bright green flavor behind classic Waldmeister soda and Maibowle. It is the genuine imported product, available as a single or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup: Concentrated German Woodruff Flavor for Drinks and Desserts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAuthentic Waldmeister flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the sweet, vanilla-like, slightly herbal taste of woodruff that Germans know from Waldmeister Brause and May punch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConcentrated syrup\u003c\/strong\u003e — mix roughly 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts water, so one bottle makes well over 20 drinks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a family-size format for home bars, parties, and cafes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVivid green color\u003c\/strong\u003e — gives spritzers, slushies, and jellies the signature Waldmeister look without extra coloring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile in the kitchen\u003c\/strong\u003e — flavors sparkling water, lemonade, cocktails, ice cream, yogurt, panna cotta, and cakes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Germany\u003c\/strong\u003e — made by Mühlhäuser, a German syrup producer, in the original European recipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a classic Waldmeister Schorle, pour about 1 fl oz (30 mL) of syrup into a glass and top with 5 to 7 fl oz of cold sparkling water; adjust to taste. For Maibowle, stir a splash into chilled white wine and sparkling water with a few strawberries. Blend syrup with crushed ice for a green slushie, or drizzle over vanilla ice cream and yogurt. Store the bottle in a cool, dry place away from sunlight, close tightly after use, and refrigerate once opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mühlhäuser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMühlhäuser is a German producer of fruit and flavor syrups, best known for traditional varieties such as Waldmeister that are hard to find outside Europe. Waldmeister, or sweet woodruff, is a woodland herb that has flavored German drinks and desserts for centuries, most famously in Maibowle served each spring. The syrup format makes that flavor easy to use year-round. Browse more imported drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e or explore our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e range. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.muehlhaeuser.de\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003emuehlhaeuser.de\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWaldmeister syrup is a sugar-based flavored syrup and does not typically contain milk, nuts, eggs, or gluten ingredients. Because this is an imported German product and recipes can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before use rather than relying on this description.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Waldmeister syrup and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMix about 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts cold sparkling or still water for a Waldmeister spritzer, or add a splash to white wine, prosecco, lemonade, or gin and tonic. Blend with ice for slushies or drizzle over ice cream. Keep the bottle cool and out of sunlight, close it tightly after each use, and refrigerate after opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Waldmeister (woodruff) syrup taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWaldmeister has a sweet, gently herbal flavor often described as a mix of vanilla, fresh hay, and green herbs with a light floral finish. It is the taste of German Waldmeister soda, green jelly, and Maibowle, the traditional May wine punch. The syrup is bright green and turns any drink the same color.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup imported from Germany?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the genuine Mühlhäuser syrup made in Germany, sold there for Waldmeister Schorle, Brause, and Maibowle. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the same 500 mL bottle sold in German supermarkets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Waldmeister syrup is a sugar-based flavored syrup and does not typically contain milk, nuts, eggs, or gluten ingredients. Because this is an imported German product and recipes can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before use rather than relying on this description.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I use Waldmeister syrup and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mix about 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts cold sparkling or still water for a Waldmeister spritzer, or add a splash to white wine, prosecco, lemonade, or gin and tonic. Blend with ice for slushies or drizzle over ice cream. Keep the bottle cool and out of sunlight, close it tightly after each use, and refrigerate after opening.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Waldmeister (woodruff) syrup taste like?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Waldmeister has a sweet, gently herbal flavor often described as a mix of vanilla, fresh hay, and green herbs with a light floral finish. It is the taste of German Waldmeister soda, green jelly, and Maibowle, the traditional May wine punch. The syrup is bright green and turns any drink the same color.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup imported from Germany?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the genuine Mühlhäuser syrup made in Germany, sold there for Waldmeister Schorle, Brause, and Maibowle. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the same 500 mL bottle sold in German supermarkets.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mühlhäuser","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45764989223103,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-SINGLE","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45764989255871,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-PACK3","price":21.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45764989288639,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-PACK6","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/wm1.png?v=1778970688"},{"product_id":"fiji-natural-artesian-bottled-water-50-7oz-1-5l","title":"FIJI Natural Artesian Bottled Water, 50.7 fl oz (1.5L)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water is a 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle of still artesian water drawn from a protected underground aquifer in the Fiji Islands, naturally filtered through volcanic rock and bottled at the source with a natural pH of 7.7. It is the largest single-serve FIJI bottle, available as a single or in 3-Pack and 6-Pack options, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water 1.5 L: Volcanic-Filtered Water Bottled at the Source\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural artesian source\u003c\/strong\u003e — rain filters for years through volcanic rock into a sealed aquifer on Viti Levu, and the water is bottled there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural pH 7.7\u003c\/strong\u003e — slightly alkaline straight from the aquifer, with nothing added to adjust it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally occurring minerals\u003c\/strong\u003e — the label analysis lists silica 93 mg\/L, calcium 18 mg\/L, magnesium 15 mg\/L, bicarbonate 152 mg\/L, and 222 mg\/L total dissolved solids\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft, smooth taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — the high silica content is what gives FIJI its signature rounded mouthfeel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest FIJI single bottle, BPA-free, sized for a full day, a hike, or a long drive\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, 3-Pack, and 6-Pack for the fridge, the car, or the office\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrink it chilled or at room temperature; the smooth, low-bitterness profile makes it a good match for meals and for brewing tea or pour-over coffee. The 1.5 L bottle fits most car cup holders and backpack side pockets, so it works as a day bottle. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and chemicals such as cleaning products, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap and refrigerate, and finish within a few days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout FIJI Water\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFIJI Water has been bottled since 1996 at a single source in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the largest of the Fiji Islands, and the company ships the finished bottles from Fiji to markets around the world. The brand is owned by The Wonderful Company of Los Angeles, which also produces POM Wonderful and Wonderful Pistachios. FIJI is a fixture in hotels, restaurants, and airport shops and is sold in sizes from 330 mL to this 1.5 L bottle. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fijiwater.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efijiwater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and bicarbonate. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve FIJI Water 1.5 L?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a few days for the cleanest taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the FIJI 1.5 L bottle and the 500 mL bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle is the largest single-serve FIJI size, three times the 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle, so it suits all-day hydration, road trips, and the dinner table. The 500 mL bottle is the grab-and-go size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does FIJI Water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and bicarbonate. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve FIJI Water 1.5 L?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a few days for the cleanest taste.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the FIJI 1.5 L bottle and the 500 mL bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle is the largest single-serve FIJI size, three times the 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle, so it suits all-day hydration, road trips, and the dinner table. The 500 mL bottle is the grab-and-go size.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does FIJI Water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"FIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Fiji","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45606736527551,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 3","offer_id":45606736560319,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-PACK3","price":13.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 6","offer_id":45606736593087,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-PACK6","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/fiji_water_11390092_1.png?v=1778965601"},{"product_id":"nescafe-tasters-choice-house-blend-decaf-instant-coffee-14oz","title":"Nescafe Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf Instant Coffee 14 oz — Light Roast","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice House Blend Decaf Instant Coffee — 14 oz jar. Smooth, rich decaf instant coffee with the full flavor of a light roast house blend — zero caffeine. Flash frozen for freshness. Dissolves instantly in hot or cold water. Makes up to 200 cups per jar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice Decaf: Full Flavor, Zero Caffeine\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — full flavor, zero caffeine; enjoy coffee anytime without the caffeine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLight Roast House Blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, balanced, clean taste; masterfully blended for a consistently great cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlash frozen for freshness\u003c\/strong\u003e — freeze-dried process locks in aroma and flavor at peak freshness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves instantly\u003c\/strong\u003e — in hot or cold water; no brewing equipment required\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 200 cups per jar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 oz jar; exceptional value per cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice\u003c\/strong\u003e — America’s #1 instant coffee brand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Prepare\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHot coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — add 1 tsp to 6 fl oz of hot water; stir until dissolved; adjust to taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIced coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — dissolve 1–2 tsp in a small amount of hot water; pour over ice; add milk or creamer as desired\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStronger cup\u003c\/strong\u003e — increase to 1.5–2 tsp per 6 fl oz for a bolder flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Nescafé Taster’s Choice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice is America’s #1 instant coffee brand, known for delivering premium instant coffee with the rich, smooth flavor of a freshly brewed cup. The House Blend Decaf uses the same masterful blending and flash-freeze process as the original — delivering full coffee flavor without the caffeine. Made in the USA. 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Nescafé Taster’s Choice Decaf completely caffeine free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice House Blend Decaf is decaffeinated — meaning the vast majority of caffeine has been removed. Like all decaf coffees, trace amounts of caffeine may remain (typically less than 5mg per serving vs. 95–100mg in regular coffee). It is suitable for those avoiding caffeine but not for those with a strict medical requirement for zero caffeine.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between freeze-dried and spray-dried instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNescafé Taster’s Choice uses a flash-freeze (freeze-dry) process, which preserves more of the coffee’s original aroma and flavor compounds than spray-drying. The result is a richer, more complex cup that is closer to freshly brewed coffee than standard spray-dried instant coffee.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many cups does the 14 oz jar make?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eThe 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups of coffee, based on 1 teaspoon (approximately 2g) per 6 fl oz of water. Adjust the amount to your taste preference — more for a stronger cup, less for a milder brew.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more: \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nescafe.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eOfficial Nescafé website at nescafe.com\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Nescafé Taster’s Choice Decaf completely caffeine free?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Nescafé Taster’s Choice Decaf is decaffeinated — trace amounts of caffeine may remain (typically under 5mg per serving). Suitable for those avoiding caffeine but not for strict medical zero-caffeine requirements.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many cups does the 14 oz decaf jar make?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups based on 1 teaspoon per 6 fl oz of water. Adjust to taste.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Nescafé Taster’s Choice Decaf freeze-dried?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes — it uses the same flash-freeze process as the regular House Blend, preserving aroma and flavor at peak freshness for a richer cup than spray-dried instant coffee.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I make iced decaf coffee with Nescafé Taster’s Choice?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. Dissolve 1–2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water, then pour over ice and add cold water, milk, or creamer to taste.\"}}]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569196368063,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-DECAF-14OZ-SINGLE","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/71C3DSzxC8L._SL1500.jpg?v=1778965611"},{"product_id":"folgers-classic-roast-instant-coffee-16-oz","title":"Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee 16 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee is a 16 oz (453 g) jar of medium-roast instant coffee crystals made from 100 percent pure coffee, dissolving in hot or cold water with no coffee maker required. The jar makes roughly 270 cups at one teaspoon per 6 fl oz serving, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee: Medium Roast Crystals in a 16 oz Jar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — the only ingredient is coffee; Folgers uses its Mountain Grown beans for the Classic Roast profile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same smooth, balanced Classic Roast flavor as the ground coffee, without the bitterness of a dark roast\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves in hot or cold water\u003c\/strong\u003e — stir into hot water for a quick cup or into cold water and ice for instant iced coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 oz (453 g) jar, about 270 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — one teaspoon per 6 fl oz cup; the large jar is the value size for households and offices\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlip-top jar with seal\u003c\/strong\u003e — the plastic jar has an easy-open flip lid that keeps the crystals dry between uses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular coffee, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd one rounded teaspoon of crystals to a mug, pour in 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use two teaspoons for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a splash of cold water first, then top with cold water, ice, and milk. The crystals also work in baking and desserts, such as tiramisu or coffee frosting, where you need coffee flavor without extra liquid. Keep the jar tightly closed in a cool, dry cupboard, use a dry spoon every time, and avoid the refrigerator, where moisture can cake the crystals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Folgers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFolgers began in San Francisco in 1850 and has been one of the best-selling coffee brands in the United States for decades. Today the brand belongs to The J.M. Smucker Company and its coffee is roasted and packed in New Orleans, Louisiana, in what is one of the largest coffee plants in the country. The Classic Roast blend, the red canister, and the jingle about the best part of waking up are all long-running Folgers signatures. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.folgerscoffee.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efolgerscoffee.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added sweeteners. It is plain coffee that you flavor yourself with milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the jar for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I make coffee with Folgers instant crystals?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePut one rounded teaspoon of crystals in a mug, add 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use more crystals for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a little cold water, then add ice, cold water, and milk. Keep the jar sealed in a dry cupboard and use a dry spoon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Folgers Instant and Folgers ground coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth use the Classic Roast medium-roast profile, but the instant version is brewed coffee that has been dried into crystals, so it dissolves completely with no grounds, filter, or machine. Ground Folgers must be brewed in a drip maker, percolator, or French press and yields a fuller body. Instant is the pick for speed, travel, camping, and recipes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFolgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, which has been the brand's main production site for decades. The beans themselves are imported green from coffee-growing regions and then roasted, brewed, and dried into crystals domestically. This 16 oz jar is the standard US retail size, not a reformulated export version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added sweeteners. It is plain coffee that you flavor yourself with milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the jar for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I make coffee with Folgers instant crystals?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Put one rounded teaspoon of crystals in a mug, add 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use more crystals for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a little cold water, then add ice, cold water, and milk. Keep the jar sealed in a dry cupboard and use a dry spoon.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Folgers Instant and Folgers ground coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both use the Classic Roast medium-roast profile, but the instant version is brewed coffee that has been dried into crystals, so it dissolves completely with no grounds, filter, or machine. Ground Folgers must be brewed in a drip maker, percolator, or French press and yields a fuller body. Instant is the pick for speed, travel, camping, and recipes.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Folgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, which has been the brand's main production site for decades. The beans themselves are imported green from coffee-growing regions and then roasted, brewed, and dried into crystals domestically. This 16 oz jar is the standard US retail size, not a reformulated export version.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Folgers","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569375707327,"sku":"FOLGERS-CLASSIC-INSTANT-16OZ","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Folgers.jpg?v=1778965606"},{"product_id":"nescafe-tasters-choice-house-blend-instant-coffee-14oz","title":"Nescafe Taster's Choice House Blend Instant Coffee 14 oz — Light Roast","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Instant Coffee — 14 oz jar. Smooth, rich premium instant coffee with the clean, balanced flavor of a light roast house blend. Flash frozen for freshness. 100% pure coffee — no fillers, no additives. Dissolves instantly in hot or cold water. Makes up to 200 cups per jar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice House Blend: Premium Instant Coffee, Every Cup\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLight Roast House Blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, balanced, clean taste; masterfully blended for a consistently great cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlash frozen for freshness\u003c\/strong\u003e — freeze-dried process locks in aroma and flavor at peak freshness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no fillers, no additives; just coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves instantly\u003c\/strong\u003e — in hot or cold water; no brewing equipment required\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 200 cups per jar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 14 oz jar; exceptional value per cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice\u003c\/strong\u003e — America's #1 instant coffee brand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Prepare\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHot coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — add 1 tsp to 6 fl oz of hot water; stir until dissolved; adjust to taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIced coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — dissolve 1–2 tsp in a small amount of hot water; pour over ice; add milk or creamer as desired\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStronger cup\u003c\/strong\u003e — increase to 1.5–2 tsp per 6 fl oz for a bolder flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Nescafé Taster's Choice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice is America's #1 instant coffee brand, known for delivering premium instant coffee with the rich, smooth flavor of a freshly brewed cup. The House Blend uses a masterful blend of select coffee beans and a flash-freeze process to deliver a consistently smooth, balanced light roast — cup after cup. Made in the USA. 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many cups does the 14 oz jar make?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eThe 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups of coffee, based on 1 teaspoon (approximately 2g) per 6 fl oz of water. Adjust the amount to your taste preference — more for a stronger cup, less for a milder brew.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between freeze-dried and spray-dried instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice uses a flash-freeze (freeze-dry) process, which preserves more of the coffee's original aroma and flavor compounds than spray-drying. The result is a richer, more complex cup that is closer to freshly brewed coffee than standard spray-dried instant coffee.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I make iced coffee with Nescafé Taster's Choice?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes. Dissolve 1–2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water first, then pour over ice and add cold water, milk, or creamer to taste. The instant formula dissolves quickly and works well for both hot and cold preparations.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more: \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nescafe.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eOfficial Nescafé website at nescafe.com\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many cups does the 14 oz jar make?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 14 oz jar makes up to 200 cups of coffee, based on 1 teaspoon per 6 fl oz of water. Adjust to taste.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Nescafé Taster's Choice freeze-dried or spray-dried?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Nescafé Taster's Choice uses a flash-freeze (freeze-dry) process — preserving more of the coffee's original aroma and flavor for a richer, fresher-tasting cup than spray-dried instant coffee.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I make iced coffee with Nescafé Taster's Choice?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. Dissolve 1–2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water, then pour over ice and add cold water, milk, or creamer to taste.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Nescafé Taster's Choice 100% pure coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes — Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend is 100% pure coffee with no fillers or additives.\"}}]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569377411263,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-HOUSEBLEND-14OZ-SINGLE","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/T.jpg?v=1778965609"},{"product_id":"cafe-bustelo-coffee-espresso-ground-coffee-brick-10-ounces-4-count","title":"Café Bustelo Coffee, Espresso Ground Coffee Brick, 10 Ounces, 4 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eCafé Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee is a 4-count pack of 10 oz (283 g) vacuum-sealed bricks, 40 oz (1.13 kg) in total, of finely ground dark-roast espresso-style coffee that brews in a moka pot, espresso machine, or ordinary drip maker. It is the classic yellow-and-red brick sold in Latin grocery stores across the United States, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCafé Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee: Dark Roast Bricks for Cafecito and Café con Leche\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDark roast, espresso-style grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — finely ground for a bold, full-bodied cup with the intensity to stand up to milk and sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour 10 oz (283 g) vacuum-packed bricks\u003c\/strong\u003e — 40 oz total; each brick stays sealed and fresh until you open it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no additives or flavorings; the brick lists coffee as its only ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrews any way you like\u003c\/strong\u003e — moka pot, espresso machine, drip coffee maker, French press, or pour-over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCuban-style coffee heritage\u003c\/strong\u003e — the brand behind cafecito, colada, and café con leche since 1928\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular dark roast, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a stovetop moka pot, fill the basket loosely and level it without tamping, use cold water to the valve line, and brew over medium heat until the coffee sputters. For drip, use about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. For a Cuban cafecito, whip the first few drops of brewed coffee with sugar into a thick paste, then stir in the rest; add steamed milk for café con leche. Once a brick is opened, transfer the grounds to an airtight container and keep it in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator, and use within two to three weeks for the best aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Café Bustelo\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCafé Bustelo was founded in 1928 in East Harlem, New York, by Gregorio Bustelo, a Spanish immigrant who had lived in Cuba and roasted coffee to suit the Caribbean and Latin American communities around him. The bright yellow can and brick became fixtures in bodegas and Latin kitchens across the United States, and the brand is now owned by The J.M. Smucker Company. Its espresso-style ground coffee remains the standard for home cafecito. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.cafebustelo.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ecafebustelo.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Café Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Café Bustelo Espresso is 100 percent pure ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, nuts, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens on its own. What you add at the cup, such as milk or condensed milk, is up to you. Read the printed label on the brick for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Café Bustelo, and how should I store the bricks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse a stovetop moka pot with the basket filled loosely and untamped, an espresso machine, or a drip maker at about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. Keep unopened bricks in a cool, dry cupboard. After opening, move the grounds to an airtight container away from heat and light and use them within two to three weeks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Café Bustelo bricks and the Café Bustelo can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe coffee inside is the same dark-roast, espresso-style grind. The 10 oz brick is vacuum-packed foil, compact and stackable, and stays sealed until you open it, which is why this 4-count pack suits stocking up. The can has a resealable plastic lid that is easier to scoop from day to day. Many households buy bricks and refill an empty can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Café Bustelo coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCafé Bustelo is a US brand, founded in New York City in 1928 and now roasted and packed in the United States by The J.M. Smucker Company. The green coffee is sourced from growing regions abroad and roasted dark domestically. This 4-count pack of 10 oz bricks is the standard US retail format sold in supermarkets and bodegas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Café Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Café Bustelo Espresso is 100 percent pure ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, nuts, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens on its own. What you add at the cup, such as milk or condensed milk, is up to you. Read the printed label on the brick for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Café Bustelo, and how should I store the bricks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use a stovetop moka pot with the basket filled loosely and untamped, an espresso machine, or a drip maker at about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. Keep unopened bricks in a cool, dry cupboard. After opening, move the grounds to an airtight container away from heat and light and use them within two to three weeks.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Café Bustelo bricks and the Café Bustelo can?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The coffee inside is the same dark-roast, espresso-style grind. The 10 oz brick is vacuum-packed foil, compact and stackable, and stays sealed until you open it, which is why this 4-count pack suits stocking up. The can has a resealable plastic lid that is easier to scoop from day to day. Many households buy bricks and refill an empty can.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Café Bustelo coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Café Bustelo is a US brand, founded in New York City in 1928 and now roasted and packed in the United States by The J.M. Smucker Company. The green coffee is sourced from growing regions abroad and roasted dark domestically. This 4-count pack of 10 oz bricks is the standard US retail format sold in supermarkets and bodegas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Café Bustelo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570945753279,"sku":"BUSTELO-ESPRESSO-GROUND-4X10OZ","price":28.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/b1.jpg?v=1778965706"},{"product_id":"chock-full-o-nuts-original-blend-ground-coffee-48oz","title":"Chock Full O Nuts Original Blend Ground Coffee 48 Ounce Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eChock Full O' Nuts Original Blend Ground Coffee is a 48 oz (1.36 kg) can of medium-roast ground coffee, the New York coffee brand's flagship blend since 1932, ground for automatic drip, percolator, and pour-over brewing. It is the family-size can that runs a busy kitchen for weeks, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChock Full O' Nuts Original Blend: New York Medium Roast Ground Coffee, 48 oz Can\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOriginal Blend medium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, balanced, and never bitter; the same everyday New York cup the brand built its name on\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e48 oz (1.36 kg) can\u003c\/strong\u003e — the large family size, with a resealable plastic lid that keeps the grounds fresh between pots\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no fillers, flavorings, or, despite the name, any nuts; the only ingredient is coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAll-purpose grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — labeled for automatic drip, percolator, and drip brewing; it also works in a French press or pour-over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNew York heritage since 1932\u003c\/strong\u003e — first sold in the brand's Manhattan lunch counters and still marketed as the Heavenly Coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular medium roast, not decaf or half-caffeine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold, fresh water in an automatic drip maker, or a rounded tablespoon per cup for a percolator, and adjust to taste. It also brews well in a French press with a four-minute steep or as cold brew at about one cup of grounds per four cups of water steeped overnight. Keep the can tightly closed in a cool, dark cupboard; do not refrigerate, since moisture and odors dull the coffee. Try to use an opened can within a month for the fullest aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Chock Full O' Nuts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChock Full O' Nuts began in 1926 as a chain of New York City nut shops founded by William Black and turned to coffee in 1932, when the shops became lunch counters serving a nickel cup of coffee. The canned coffee followed and became a household name across the Northeast, helped by its Heavenly Coffee jingle. The brand is now owned by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA and its coffee is roasted in the United States. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.chockfullonuts.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003echockfullonuts.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contain nuts or other allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Despite the name, Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contains no nuts and is 100 percent ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The name comes from the company's origin as a chain of nut shops. Read the printed label for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Chock Full O' Nuts coffee, and how should I store the can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse one level tablespoon per 6 fl oz of cold water in an automatic drip maker or percolator and adjust to taste; the grind also suits French press and pour-over. Keep the can tightly closed with its plastic lid in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator. Finish an opened can within about a month for the best aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Original Blend and the other Chock Full O' Nuts roasts?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOriginal Blend is the medium roast and the brand's classic all-day cup, balanced with no bitterness. New York Roast is a bolder medium-dark roast, French Roast is darker with a smoky edge, 100 percent Colombian uses single-origin beans for a brighter flavor, and Half Caff cuts the caffeine roughly in half. Original Blend suits a household with mixed tastes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Chock Full O' Nuts coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChock Full O' Nuts is an American brand born in New York City in 1932 and its coffee is roasted and canned in the United States by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA. The beans are sourced from coffee-growing regions abroad and roasted domestically. This 48 oz can is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contain nuts or other allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Despite the name, Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contains no nuts and is 100 percent ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The name comes from the company's origin as a chain of nut shops. Read the printed label for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Chock Full O' Nuts coffee, and how should I store the can?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use one level tablespoon per 6 fl oz of cold water in an automatic drip maker or percolator and adjust to taste; the grind also suits French press and pour-over. Keep the can tightly closed with its plastic lid in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator. Finish an opened can within about a month for the best aroma.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Original Blend and the other Chock Full O' Nuts roasts?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Original Blend is the medium roast and the brand's classic all-day cup, balanced with no bitterness. New York Roast is a bolder medium-dark roast, French Roast is darker with a smoky edge, 100 percent Colombian uses single-origin beans for a brighter flavor, and Half Caff cuts the caffeine roughly in half. Original Blend suits a household with mixed tastes.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Chock Full O' Nuts coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Chock Full O' Nuts is an American brand born in New York City in 1932 and its coffee is roasted and canned in the United States by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA. The beans are sourced from coffee-growing regions abroad and roasted domestically. This 48 oz can is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Chock Full O' Nuts","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570955288767,"sku":"CHOCKFULL-ORIGBLEND-48OZ","price":37.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/C1_5f54bef9-9110-46de-ab7f-9254cc040811.jpg?v=1778965713"},{"product_id":"dunkin-original-blend-ground-coffee-medium-roast-40oz","title":"Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee, Medium Roast, 40 oz","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee is America's favorite medium roast coffee — smooth, balanced, and full of flavor. Made with 100% Arabica beans, roasted and ground at the peak of flavor. 40 oz bag. Caffeinated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAmerica Runs on Dunkin'. Now in Your Kitchen.\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend is the coffee that has fueled America for decades — smooth, balanced, and consistently delicious. Made with 100% Arabica beans, carefully selected and roasted to a perfect medium roast, Dunkin' Original Blend delivers the familiar, satisfying coffee flavor that millions of Americans start their day with. Now in a generous 40 oz bag, so you can enjoy that iconic Dunkin' taste at home, every single morning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Arabica Beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — carefully selected for smooth, balanced flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — perfectly balanced, not too light, not too dark\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSmooth \u0026amp; Balanced\u003c\/strong\u003e — no bitterness, consistently delicious cup after cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGround Coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — ready to brew, no grinding needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — the energy boost you need to start your day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40 oz Bag\u003c\/strong\u003e — generous family-size portion for everyday brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBrew Guide\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse 1 tablespoon per 6 oz of water. Adjust to taste. Compatible with drip coffee makers, pour-over, and most standard home brewing methods. Store in a cool, dry place and seal tightly after opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Dunkin' Original Blend made with Arabica beans?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — 100% Arabica beans, roasted and ground at the peak of flavor.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat roast level is Dunkin' Original Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eMedium roast — perfectly balanced between light and dark for a smooth, well-rounded flavor.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs it caffeinated?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — fully caffeinated.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Dunkin' Original Blend made with Arabica beans?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes — 100% Arabica beans, roasted and ground at the peak of flavor for a smooth, balanced cup every time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What roast level is Dunkin' Original Blend?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Medium roast — perfectly balanced between light and dark for a smooth, well-rounded flavor without bitterness.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I brew Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Use 1 tablespoon per 6 oz of water. Compatible with drip coffee makers, pour-over, and most standard home brewing methods. Adjust to your preferred strength.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee caffeinated?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes — fully caffeinated. Dunkin' Original Blend is the energizing medium roast that fuels America every morning.\"}}]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Dunkin'","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570964857023,"sku":"DUNKIN-ORIGBLEND-GROUND-40OZ","price":40.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/dunkin.webp?v=1778970233"},{"product_id":"folgers-classic-roast-coffee-2-pack-of-43-5-ounces-2-pack","title":"Folgers Classic Roast Coffee, 43.5 Ounces","description":"\u003cp\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee is a 43.5 oz (1.23 kg) canister of medium-roast ground coffee made from 100 percent pure coffee, packed in the red Folgers AromaSeal canister and sized to brew up to 400 six-ounce cups. It is the largest everyday Folgers canister, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee: Medium Roast in the 43.5 oz AromaSeal Canister\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium roast, smooth and balanced\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Classic Roast profile that has anchored the Folgers line for generations, mild enough for all-day drinking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e43.5 oz (1.23 kg) canister, up to 400 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — the family-size can, with a scoop line and grip handles molded into the sides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mountain Grown beans, no additives or flavorings; coffee is the only ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAromaSeal canister\u003c\/strong\u003e — the flexible plastic can with a snap-tight lid that Folgers designed to keep grounds fresh after opening\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAll-purpose grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — suited to automatic drip makers, percolators, pour-over cones, and French press\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular Classic Roast, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold, fresh water for a standard cup, or up to two tablespoons for a stronger brew, in an automatic drip maker, percolator, or French press. For cold brew, steep one cup of grounds in four cups of cold water for 12 to 18 hours and strain. Press the lid firmly closed after every scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard, never the refrigerator or freezer, where moisture and odors dull the flavor. Try to use an opened canister within a month.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Folgers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFolgers began in San Francisco in 1850 and has been one of the best-selling coffee brands in the United States for decades. Today the brand belongs to The J.M. Smucker Company and its coffee is roasted and packed in New Orleans, Louisiana, in what is one of the largest coffee plants in the country. The Classic Roast blend, the red canister, and the jingle about the best part of waking up are all long-running Folgers signatures. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.folgerscoffee.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efolgerscoffee.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Folgers Classic Roast lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added flavorings. It is plain ground coffee that you finish with your own milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the canister for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Folgers Classic Roast, and how should I store the canister?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold water in a drip maker or percolator, or two for a stronger cup. Snap the AromaSeal lid closed after each scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard rather than the refrigerator. Aim to finish an opened canister within about a month for the fullest aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Folgers Classic Roast and Folgers Black Silk or Breakfast Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eClassic Roast is the medium roast at the center of the Folgers line, balanced and mild enough to drink all day. Breakfast Blend is a lighter, brighter roast, while Black Silk is a dark roast with a bolder, smokier body. All three are ground the same way and brew identically, so the choice comes down to roast strength.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFolgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, the brand's main production site for decades. The beans are imported green from coffee-growing regions and roasted domestically. This 43.5 oz canister is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs, not an export or reformulated version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Folgers Classic Roast lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added flavorings. It is plain ground coffee that you finish with your own milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the canister for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Folgers Classic Roast, and how should I store the canister?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold water in a drip maker or percolator, or two for a stronger cup. Snap the AromaSeal lid closed after each scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard rather than the refrigerator. Aim to finish an opened canister within about a month for the fullest aroma.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Folgers Classic Roast and Folgers Black Silk or Breakfast Blend?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Classic Roast is the medium roast at the center of the Folgers line, balanced and mild enough to drink all day. Breakfast Blend is a lighter, brighter roast, while Black Silk is a dark roast with a bolder, smokier body. All three are ground the same way and brew identically, so the choice comes down to roast strength.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Folgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, the brand's main production site for decades. The beans are imported green from coffee-growing regions and roasted domestically. This 43.5 oz canister is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs, not an export or reformulated version.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Folgers","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570980716735,"sku":"FOLGERS-CLASSIC-ROAST-43-5OZ","price":29.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_f8cc4653-af28-4b99-8391-8fbb65dddb44.jpg?v=1778965719"},{"product_id":"cafe-almond-barista-32-fluid-ounces-6-pack","title":"Califa Farms Café Almond Barista 32 Fluid Ounces","description":"\u003cp\u003eCalifia Farms Almond Barista Blend is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton of dairy-free almond milk formulated for coffee: it steams, froths, and holds foam for lattes and cappuccinos without curdling or bitterness. It is vegan, kosher, Non-GMO Project verified, and carrageenan-free, with a neutral taste that lets the espresso lead, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCalifia Farms Almond Barista Blend: Dairy-Free Almond Milk That Froths for Lattes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBuilt to steam and froth\u003c\/strong\u003e — a barista formulation that produces stable microfoam for latte art and cappuccinos\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo curdling in hot or iced coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — blends smoothly into espresso, cold brew, and drip coffee without splitting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNeutral, creamy taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — a mild almond profile that complements rather than covers the coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, kosher, Non-GMO Project verified\u003c\/strong\u003e — made without carrageenan or dairy ingredients\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard cafe size, enough for roughly 8 to 12 lattes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced by Califia Farms, based in Bakersfield, California\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton, pour cold milk into a steaming pitcher, and stretch it with the steam wand just below the surface until it reaches about 140 to 150 F (60 to 65 C); swirl and pour for latte art. For iced drinks, pour straight over espresso and ice. It also works in a handheld frother or French press for home cappuccinos. Refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Califia Farms\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCalifia Farms was founded in 2010 in Bakersfield, California, in the heart of the state's almond-growing region, and is named after the mythical queen Califia for whom California was named. The company makes plant-based milks, creamers, cold brew coffee, and barista blends, all dairy-free and vegan. Its products are made in the United States. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.califiafarms.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ecalifiafarms.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, or carrageenan and is labeled vegan and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore the carton according to the printed panel; this format is shelf-stable until opened, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry until the best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it, keep it tightly closed, and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before each use, as light separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Barista Blend and regular Califia almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRegular Califia almond milk is thinner and can split or foam poorly when steamed. The Barista Blend is formulated with a little more body so it stretches into stable, glossy microfoam and holds up in hot espresso without curdling. The taste is deliberately neutral so the coffee, not the milk, comes through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCalifia Farms is headquartered in Bakersfield, California, in the state's almond-growing region, and its products are made in the United States for the US and Canadian market. This is a domestic product, not an import. The carton is available here as a single 32 fl oz (946 mL) unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, or carrageenan and is labeled vegan and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store the carton according to the printed panel; this format is shelf-stable until opened, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry until the best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it, keep it tightly closed, and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before each use, as light separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Barista Blend and regular Califia almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Regular Califia almond milk is thinner and can split or foam poorly when steamed. The Barista Blend is formulated with a little more body so it stretches into stable, glossy microfoam and holds up in hot espresso without curdling. The taste is deliberately neutral so the coffee, not the milk, comes through.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Califia Farms is headquartered in Bakersfield, California, in the state's almond-growing region, and its products are made in the United States for the US and Canadian market. This is a domestic product, not an import. The carton is available here as a single 32 fl oz (946 mL) unit.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Califa Farms","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570995626175,"sku":"CALIFIA-ALMOND-BARISTA-32OZ","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/m1.jpg?v=1778965733"},{"product_id":"voss-artesian-still-water-12-7-fl-oz-glass-bottle","title":"VOSS Artesian Still Water 12.7 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVOSS Artesian Still Water\u003c\/strong\u003e is one of the world's most recognized premium water brands — served in the iconic VOSS cylindrical glass bottle. Sourced from a pristine artesian aquifer deep beneath the earth in Vatnestrøm, Norway and naturally filtered through layers of rock and sand over centuries, VOSS Still delivers an exceptionally clean, crisp, and smooth taste with ultra-low mineral content. The 12.7 fl oz (375ml) glass bottle is the perfect single-serve size for fine dining, events, and everyday premium hydration. Please recycle responsibly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose VOSS Artesian Still Water Glass Bottle?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePristine Norwegian artesian source:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sourced from a protected artesian aquifer in Vatnestrøm, Norway — naturally filtered through layers of rock and sand over centuries for exceptional purity and a crisp, smooth taste.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUltra-low TDS — exceptionally clean taste:\u003c\/strong\u003e VOSS has a naturally low Total Dissolved Solids level — delivering a clean, neutral taste that lets the natural purity of the water shine through without any mineral aftertaste.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalanced mineral profile:\u003c\/strong\u003e Calcium 5 mg\/L | Magnesium 1 mg\/L | Potassium 0 mg\/L | Chloride 12 mg\/L | TDS 290 mg\/L — a naturally balanced, ultra-pure mineral composition.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIconic recyclable glass bottle:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 12.7 fl oz (375ml) cylindrical glass bottle is one of the most recognized premium water bottles in the world — elegant, reusable, and fully recyclable. Please recycle responsibly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVOSS sustainability commitment:\u003c\/strong\u003e VOSS maintains a strong commitment to sustainability — focusing on package optimization, carbon footprint reduction, and water stewardship. A priority is reducing plastic with significant reductions in the amount used in each bottle and expanding use of recycled PET across the VOSS portfolio.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct:\u003c\/strong\u003e VOSS Artesian Still Water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNet Volume:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12.7 fl oz (375ml) per bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType:\u003c\/strong\u003e Still Artesian Water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIngredients:\u003c\/strong\u003e Artesian Water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCalories:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0 | Sodium: 0mg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMineral Content (mg\/L):\u003c\/strong\u003e Ca 5 | Mg 1 | K 0 | Cl 12 | TDS 290\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBottle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Iconic cylindrical glass (reusable \u0026amp; recyclable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSource:\u003c\/strong\u003e Artesian aquifer, Vatnestrøm, Norway\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e VOSS of Norway ASA\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCountry of Origin:\u003c\/strong\u003e Norway\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Enjoy VOSS Artesian Still Water\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe well chilled for the best taste experience. VOSS Artesian Still Water pairs beautifully with fine dining, sushi, seafood, cheese boards, and light cuisine — its clean, neutral taste complements food without competing with flavors. The iconic glass bottle is reusable and recyclable — repurpose as a stylish water carafe or vase. Please recycle responsibly. Browse our full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/beverages\"\u003ebeverages collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more premium imported waters, including VOSS Sparkling Water.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout VOSS\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVOSS Water was founded in 2000 and sources its water from a pristine artesian aquifer in Vatnestrøm, southern Norway. Recognized worldwide for its iconic cylindrical bottle and exceptional water purity, VOSS is served in fine dining restaurants, luxury hotels, and premium retailers across more than 50 countries. VOSS maintains a strong commitment to sustainability — focusing on carbon footprint reduction, package optimization, and water stewardship. \u003cem\u003eIt's What's On The Inside.\u003c\/em\u003e \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.vosswater.com\/\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eLearn more at vosswater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between VOSS Still Glass Bottle and VOSS Still PET bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eBoth contain the same pristine Norwegian artesian water from Vatnestrøm. The 12.7 fl oz (375ml) glass bottle features the iconic VOSS cylindrical design — elegant, reusable, and perfect for the table. The 16.9 fl oz (500ml) PET bottle is made from 100% recycled rPET — lightweight and ideal for on-the-go hydration.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs the VOSS glass bottle reusable?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — the iconic VOSS cylindrical glass bottle is reusable and recyclable. Many customers repurpose it as a stylish water carafe, vase, or reusable bottle. Please recycle responsibly.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is VOSS's sustainability commitment?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eVOSS maintains a strong commitment to sustainability — focusing on package optimization, carbon footprint reduction, and water stewardship. VOSS is actively reducing plastic usage and expanding the use of recycled PET (rPET) across its portfolio, including new VOSS+ items available in 100% rPET bottles.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack size offers the best value?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eThe Pack of 12 offers the best per-bottle price — ideal for daily hydration, the gym, office, or stocking up at home.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Where does VOSS Artesian Still Water come from?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"VOSS Artesian Still Water is sourced from a pristine artesian aquifer in Vatnestrøm, southern Norway — naturally filtered through layers of rock and sand over centuries for exceptional purity and a clean, smooth taste.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is the VOSS glass bottle reusable?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes — the iconic VOSS cylindrical glass bottle is reusable and fully recyclable. Many customers repurpose it as a stylish water carafe or vase. Please recycle responsibly.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the mineral content of VOSS Artesian Still Water?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"VOSS has ultra-low TDS (290 mg\/L) with a balanced mineral profile: Calcium 5 mg\/L, Magnesium 1 mg\/L, Potassium 0 mg\/L, Chloride 12 mg\/L.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is VOSS Artesian Still Water available in multipacks?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. VOSS Still Water 12.7 fl oz glass bottles are available as a Single bottle, 3-Pack, 6-Pack, or 12-Pack — choose the size that best fits your needs.\"}}]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Voss","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45651515048127,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45651515080895,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45651515113663,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK6","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45651515146431,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK12","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_ced87809-b044-4ed9-95d3-123803802a20.png?v=1779549211"},{"product_id":"fiji-natural-artesian-bottled-water-16-9oz-500ml","title":"FIJI Natural Artesian Bottled Water, 16.9 fl oz (500ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water is a 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle of still artesian water drawn from a protected underground aquifer in the Fiji Islands, naturally filtered through volcanic rock and bottled at the source with a natural pH of 7.7. It is the everyday grab-and-go FIJI size, available as a single or in 3-Pack, 6-Pack, and 12-Pack options, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water 500 mL: Volcanic-Filtered Water Bottled at the Source\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural artesian source\u003c\/strong\u003e — rain filters for years through volcanic rock into a sealed aquifer on Viti Levu, and the water is bottled there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural pH 7.7\u003c\/strong\u003e — slightly alkaline straight from the aquifer, with nothing added to adjust it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally occurring electrolytes\u003c\/strong\u003e — the label lists calcium, magnesium, and potassium picked up from the volcanic rock, never added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft, smooth taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — the silica-rich mineral profile gives FIJI its signature rounded mouthfeel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard single-serve size, BPA-free and made from recycled plastic, sized for bags and lunchboxes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, 3-Pack, 6-Pack, and 12-Pack for the fridge, the office, or events\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrink it chilled or at room temperature; the smooth, low-bitterness profile suits meals, desk hydration, and hotel-style table service. The 500 mL bottle fits standard cup holders, gym bags, and lunchboxes. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and chemicals such as cleaning products, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap and refrigerate, and finish within a day or two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout FIJI Water\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFIJI Water has been bottled since 1996 at a single source in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the largest of the Fiji Islands, and the company ships the finished bottles from Fiji to markets around the world. The brand is owned by The Wonderful Company of Los Angeles, which also produces POM Wonderful and Wonderful Pistachios. FIJI is a fixture in hotels, restaurants, and airport shops and is sold in sizes from 330 mL to 1.5 L. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fijiwater.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efijiwater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and potassium. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve FIJI Water 500 mL?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a day or two for the cleanest taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the FIJI 500 mL bottle and the 1.5 L bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the single-serve size for bags, lunchboxes, and events, sold in 12-packs. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle holds three times as much and suits all-day hydration and the dinner table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does FIJI Water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and potassium. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve FIJI Water 500 mL?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a day or two for the cleanest taste.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the FIJI 500 mL bottle and the 1.5 L bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the single-serve size for bags, lunchboxes, and events, sold in 12-packs. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle holds three times as much and suits all-day hydration and the dinner table.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does FIJI Water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"FIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Fiji","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45606700646591,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 3","offer_id":45606700679359,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK3","price":8.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 6","offer_id":45606700712127,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK6","price":15.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lot de 12","offer_id":45606700744895,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK12","price":29.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/f1.jpg?v=1778965781"},{"product_id":"nescafe-clasico-instant-coffee-dark-roast-1-jar-10-5-oz","title":"NESCAFÉ CLÁSICO Dark Roast Instant Coffee, 10.5 oz – Makes Up to 150 Cups","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eNESC AFÉ CLÁSICO Dark Roast Instant Coffee delivers a bold, rich cup of premium instant coffee — the world's best-selling instant coffee brand. Made from 100% pure coffee, roasted dark for an intense, full-bodied flavor. 10.5 oz jar, makes up to 150 cups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDark Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — bold, intense, full-bodied flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Pure Coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no fillers, no additives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorld's Best-Selling Instant Coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — trusted by millions worldwide\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMakes Up to 150 Cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — 10.5 oz jar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e NESC AFÉ CLÁSICO\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[\n{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How many cups does a 10.5 oz jar of NESCAFE CLASICO make?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"A 10.5 oz jar of NESCAFE CLASICO makes up to 150 cups of instant coffee when prepared at the standard serving strength.\"}},\n{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is NESCAFE CLASICO 100% pure coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. NESCAFE CLASICO is made from 100% pure coffee — no fillers, no additives, just real roasted coffee in instant form.\"}},\n{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What roast level is NESCAFE CLASICO?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"NESCAFE CLASICO is a dark roast — delivering a bold, intense, full-bodied coffee flavor perfect for those who prefer a rich, strong cup of coffee.\"}},\n{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I prepare NESCAFE CLASICO instant coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Add 1 teaspoon (approximately 2g) of NESCAFE CLASICO to 6 fl oz of hot water. Stir until dissolved. Adjust the amount of coffee to your preferred strength.\"}}\n]}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43571328123071,"sku":"NESCAFE-CLASICO-DARK-105OZ","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_9045c812-bc6c-4780-92b9-2f900e1f08f8.jpg?v=1778965783"},{"product_id":"dunkin-original-blend-medium-roast-k-cup-pods-72-count","title":"Dunkin' Original Blend Medium Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods, 72 Count","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend Medium Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods bring the iconic Dunkin' coffee experience to your home in seconds. 72 Keurig Genuine K-Cup pods, each 0.37 oz (10.5g). Net weight 26.6 oz (756g). Recyclable pods. Compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAmerica Runs on Dunkin'. One Pod at a Time.\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend is the coffee that has fueled America for decades — and now you can enjoy that same iconic flavor at home in seconds. Each K-Cup pod is packed with Dunkin's signature medium roast coffee made from 100% Arabica beans, delivering the smooth, balanced, full-bodied flavor you know and love — fresh, fast, and mess-free every single time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 Keurig Genuine K-Cup Pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — each 0.37 oz (10.5g), net weight 26.6 oz (756g)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Arabica Beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, balanced, full-bodied medium roast flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — perfectly balanced, the iconic Dunkin' Original Blend taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible with All Keurig K-Cup Brewers\u003c\/strong\u003e — Keurig Genuine K-Cup Pods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable Pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — peel, empty, recycle where facilities exist\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — the energy boost you need to start your day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 Count\u003c\/strong\u003e — keeps home or office stocked for weeks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBrew Instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems. Insert pod, select your preferred cup size, and brew. For best results, use 8 oz cup size for a bold, full-flavored cup. Peel, empty, and recycle the pod after use where facilities exist.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre these compatible with my Keurig?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — Keurig Genuine K-Cup Pods, compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre the pods recyclable?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — peel the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle the pod. Check locally as not all communities recycle K-Cup pods.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many pods are in the box?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003e72 K-Cup pods, each 0.37 oz (10.5g), total net weight 26.6 oz (756g).\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these compatible with my Keurig?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — Dunkin' Original Blend K-Cup Pods are Keurig Genuine K-Cup Pods, compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are the pods recyclable?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — peel the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle the pod. Check locally as not all communities recycle K-Cup pods.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How many pods are in the box?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"72 K-Cup pods, each 0.37 oz (10.5g), total net weight 26.6 oz (756g).\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Dunkin'","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343792992447,"sku":"DUNKIN-ORIGBLEND-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/DunkinDonuts.png?v=1778966471"},{"product_id":"starbucks-caffe-verona-dark-roast-coffee-k-cups-72-count-bold-rich-flavor-for-keurig-brewers","title":"Starbucks Caffè Verona Dark Roast Coffee K-Cups – 72 Count | Bold \u0026 Rich Flavor for Keurig Brewers","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Caffè Verona Dark Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods deliver a bold, rich, full-bodied dark roast — one of Starbucks' most beloved blends. Dark caramelly roast with a hint of bittersweet chocolate. 72 count, compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffè Verona Dark Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — bold, rich, dark caramelly flavor with hints of bittersweet chocolate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Arabica Beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — premium quality, expertly roasted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup Pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — enough for weeks of daily brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig Compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — works with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Starbucks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What does Starbucks Caffe Verona dark roast taste like?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Starbucks Caffe Verona is a bold, rich dark roast with a dark caramelly flavor and hints of bittersweet chocolate. It is full-bodied and intensely flavorful — one of Starbucks' most beloved blends.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these K-Cup pods compatible with my Keurig?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Starbucks Caffe Verona K-Cup Pods are compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343814455487,"sku":"STARBUCKS-CAFFEVERONA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Verona1.png?v=1778966479"},{"product_id":"starbucks-sumatra-dark-roast-coffee-k-cups-72-count-single-origin-bold-earthy-keurig-compatible","title":"Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast Coffee K-Cups – 72 Count | Single-Origin, Bold \u0026 Earthy | Keurig Compatible","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Sumatra Dark Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods deliver the bold, earthy richness of single-origin Sumatra — a complex, full-bodied dark roast with low acidity and a smooth, long finish. 72 count, compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSingle-Origin Sumatra Dark Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — bold, earthy, complex with low acidity\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Arabica Beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — premium single-origin quality\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup Pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — enough for weeks of daily brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig Compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — works with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Starbucks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What does Starbucks Sumatra dark roast coffee taste like?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Starbucks Sumatra is a bold, earthy single-origin dark roast with low acidity and a smooth, long finish. It has a complex, full-bodied flavor with herbal and syrupy notes — characteristic of Sumatran coffee.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are these K-Cup pods compatible with my Keurig?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Starbucks Sumatra K-Cup Pods are compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343823499455,"sku":"STARBUCKS-SUMATRA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/sumatra.png?v=1778966496"},{"product_id":"epsa-lemonade-232ml-glass-bottle","title":"EPSA Lemonade, Sparkling Greek Lemon Soda with 7% Real Juice, 7.85 fl oz (232ml) Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eEPSA Lemonade is a 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) embossed glass bottle of sparkling Greek lemon soda made with 7 percent real lemon juice and no artificial colors, produced in Greece since 1924. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 4, 8, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eEPSA Lemonade: Sparkling Greek Lemon Soda with 7 Percent Real Juice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7 percent real lemon juice\u003c\/strong\u003e — from concentrated juice, giving a tart, genuine citrus flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water, sugar, lemon juice, citric acid, natural flavorings, and a stabilizer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFine carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — small, crisp bubbles that soften the tartness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-time Crystal Taste Award winner\u003c\/strong\u003e — recognized by the International Taste Institute in Brussels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct of Greece\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by EPSA in Volos in the signature embossed 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 4, Pack of 8, and Pack of 12 for parties and the fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice-cold straight from the bottle, or pour over ice with a wedge of lemon. It mixes well with tequila, gin, or vodka and with a splash of ouzo for a Greek-style spritz, and it pairs with grilled fish and mezze. Store bottles upright in a cool, dark place and refrigerate before serving; once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout EPSA\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEPSA, short for Elliniki Paragogi Soft Drinks, was founded in Volos, Greece, in 1924 and is one of the country's oldest soft drink makers, known for its ridged glass bottle and real-juice lemonade and orangeade. The bottles are a fixture of Greek cafes, tavernas, and seaside kiosks. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.epsa.gr\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eepsa.gr\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes EPSA Lemonade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, sugar, 7 percent lemon juice from concentrate, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store EPSA Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon wedge, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between EPSA Lemonade and EPSA Orangeade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and tastes tart, sharp, and citrus-forward, which makes it the better mixer for tequila and gin. EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and cloudier. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with the same fine carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs EPSA Lemonade imported from Greece?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the authentic EPSA Lemonade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade served in Greek tavernas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does EPSA Lemonade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, sugar, 7 percent lemon juice from concentrate, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store EPSA Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon wedge, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between EPSA Lemonade and EPSA Orangeade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and tastes tart, sharp, and citrus-forward, which makes it the better mixer for tequila and gin. EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and cloudier. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with the same fine carbonation.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is EPSA Lemonade imported from Greece?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the authentic EPSA Lemonade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade served in Greek tavernas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Epsa","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45610399531199,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 4","offer_id":45725617881279,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK4","price":16.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 8","offer_id":45725617914047,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK8","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45725617946815,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK12","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_5368c864-90a1-4d82-a0c5-ef9e51706499.png?v=1781804987"},{"product_id":"epsa-orangeade-232ml-glass-bottle","title":"EPSA Orangeade Sparkling Greek Orange Soda, 232ml","description":"\u003cp\u003eEPSA Orangeade is a 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) embossed glass bottle of sparkling Greek orange soda made with 20 percent real orange juice and no artificial colors, produced in Greece since 1924. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 4, 8, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eEPSA Orangeade: Sparkling Greek Orange Soda with 20 Percent Real Juice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e20 percent real orange juice\u003c\/strong\u003e — from concentrated juice, far more than most orange sodas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors\u003c\/strong\u003e — the cloudy orange color comes from the juice itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFine carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentle bubbles that keep the orange flavor soft and rounded\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVegetarian and vegan\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water, orange juice, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, and a stabilizer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct of Greece\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by EPSA in Volos in the signature embossed 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 4, Pack of 8, and Pack of 12 for parties and the fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice-cold straight from the bottle, or pour over ice with an orange slice. It makes a Greek-style spritz with Aperol or a vodka soda with real fruit flavor, and it pairs with grilled meat, souvlaki, and mezze. Store bottles upright in a cool, dark place and refrigerate before serving; once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout EPSA\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEPSA, short for Elliniki Paragogi Soft Drinks, was founded in Volos, Greece, in 1924 and is one of the country's oldest soft drink makers, known for its ridged glass bottle and real-juice lemonade and orangeade. The bottles are a fixture of Greek cafes, tavernas, and seaside kiosks. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.epsa.gr\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eepsa.gr\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes EPSA Orangeade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, 20 percent orange juice from concentrate, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store EPSA Orangeade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with an orange slice, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between EPSA Orangeade and EPSA Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and naturally cloudy, closer to a sparkling juice than a typical orange soda. EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and is sharper and more tart. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with fine carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs EPSA Orangeade imported from Greece?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the authentic EPSA Orangeade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same orangeade served in Greek tavernas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does EPSA Orangeade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, 20 percent orange juice from concentrate, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store EPSA Orangeade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with an orange slice, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between EPSA Orangeade and EPSA Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and naturally cloudy, closer to a sparkling juice than a typical orange soda. EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and is sharper and more tart. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with fine carbonation.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is EPSA Orangeade imported from Greece?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the authentic EPSA Orangeade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same orangeade served in Greek tavernas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Epsa","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45610371645631,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 4","offer_id":45610371678399,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK4","price":16.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lot 8","offer_id":45610371711167,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK8","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet-12","offer_id":45610371743935,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK12","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_3e02ddb7-a98d-4eb3-96e6-01c7d23292da.png?v=1781804984"},{"product_id":"orangina-sparkling-citrus-juice-8-5oz","title":"Orangina Sparkling Citrus Juice, Original French Recipe, 8.5 oz","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eOrangina is France's iconic sparkling citrus juice beverage — crafted since 1936 from a unique blend of orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices with natural pulp, lightly carbonated, no artificial ingredients, no preservatives, no high-fructose corn syrup. Served in the signature 8.5 oz glass bottle. The original European citrus experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe Original. Since 1936. Made in France.\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSome drinks are timeless. Orangina has been refreshing Europe since 1936 — a uniquely French creation that defies easy categorization. Not quite a soda. Not quite a juice. Something altogether more interesting: a lightly sparkling citrus juice beverage with real fruit pulp, crafted from a blend of orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices, gently carbonated for a refreshing effervescence that is less intense than soda yet more exciting than still juice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe signature round glass bottle is not just iconic — it is functional. Shake it before opening to redistribute the natural pulp and release the full citrus aroma. That ritual has been part of the Orangina experience for nearly 90 years. No artificial ingredients. No preservatives. No high-fructose corn syrup. Just real citrus, real bubbles, and nearly a century of French craftsmanship.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOriginal 1936 French Recipe\u003c\/strong\u003e — authentic Orangina, imported from Europe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal Citrus Juice Blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural Light Pulp\u003c\/strong\u003e — real fruit pulp for authentic citrus texture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly Sparkling\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentle carbonation, less intense than soda, more exciting than juice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo Artificial Ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — no artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo High-Fructose Corn Syrup\u003c\/strong\u003e — clean label European formula\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIconic 8.5 oz Glass Bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — signature round bottle, shake before opening\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Enjoy Orangina\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake gently before opening to redistribute the natural pulp — this is the Orangina ritual, unchanged since 1936. Serve well chilled over ice for maximum refreshment. Enjoy on its own as a sophisticated alternative to soda, pair with brunch, or use as a mixer: Orangina + vodka or gin makes a classic European citrus spritz.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Orangina contain real juice?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — Orangina is made with a real blend of citrus juices including orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit, with natural light pulp. It is not an artificially flavored soda.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy should I shake Orangina before opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eOrangina contains natural fruit pulp that settles at the bottom of the bottle. Shaking gently before opening redistributes the pulp and releases the full citrus aroma — this is the classic Orangina ritual since 1936.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Orangina contain artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNo — Orangina contains no artificial ingredients, no preservatives, and no high-fructose corn syrup.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Orangina contain real juice?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — Orangina is made with a real blend of citrus juices including orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit, with natural light pulp. It is not an artificially flavored soda.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Why should I shake Orangina before opening?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Orangina contains natural fruit pulp that settles at the bottom of the bottle. Shaking gently before opening redistributes the pulp and releases the full citrus aroma — this is the classic Orangina ritual since 1936.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Orangina contain artificial ingredients?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No — Orangina contains no artificial ingredients, no preservatives, and no high-fructose corn syrup.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Orangina","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45599369822399,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 6","offer_id":45599369855167,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-PACK6","price":26.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lot de 12","offer_id":45599369887935,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-PACK12","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/orangina-1.png?v=1778966556"},{"product_id":"mezzo-mix-6-pack-0-33l-cans-german-cola-and-orange-soda-blend-refreshing-citrus-soft-drink-imported-coca-cola-brand-beverage","title":"Mezzo Mix 11.15 fl oz Cans (330ml) – German Cola Orange Soda – Imported from Germany","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eMezzo Mix is Germany's iconic cola-orange soda blend, imported directly from Germany. A Coca-Cola brand beloved across Europe for decades — crisp, fizzy, and uniquely refreshing. Each can is 11.15 fl oz (330ml). Available in Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMezzo Mix – Germany's Cola-Orange Original\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUnique Cola-Orange Blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — combines smooth cola with vibrant orange flavor for a refreshing twist on a classic soft drink\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Germany\u003c\/strong\u003e — authentic Coca-Cola brand product enjoyed across Europe, not available in US grocery stores\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCrisp \u0026amp; Fizzy\u003c\/strong\u003e — light carbonation for a balanced, thirst-quenching experience\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e11.15 fl oz Cans (330ml)\u003c\/strong\u003e — convenient, portable format\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe chilled for the best experience. Pour over ice or enjoy straight from the can. Pairs well with pizza, burgers, and light snacks. Store unopened cans at room temperature; refrigerate after opening and consume within 24 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Mezzo Mix\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMezzo Mix is a Coca-Cola brand exclusive to Germany, first introduced in the 1970s. It has built a loyal following across Europe as a distinctive alternative to standard cola — lighter and more playful, with a natural orange lift. Not available in US retail stores, Mezzo Mix is imported by Real Prime Deals directly from Germany.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eWhat is Mezzo Mix?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eMezzo Mix is an iconic German soft drink that blends Coca-Cola with orange soda — a Coca-Cola brand imported from Germany, popular across Europe for its distinctive cola-orange flavor.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eIs Mezzo Mix available in the US?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eMezzo Mix is not sold in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals imports it directly from Germany and ships it to your door in 11.15 fl oz (330ml) cans.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExplore more imported beverages in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/beverages\"\u003eBeverages\u003c\/a\u003e collection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is Mezzo Mix?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mezzo Mix is an iconic German soft drink that blends Coca-Cola with orange soda. It is a Coca-Cola brand beverage imported from Germany, popular across Europe for its distinctive cola-orange flavor.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Mezzo Mix available in the US?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Mezzo Mix is not sold in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals imports it directly from Germany and ships it to your door in 11.15 fl oz (330ml) cans.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Mezzo Mix","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":44352930807999,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45906749358271,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK3","price":9.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45906749391039,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK6","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45906749423807,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK12","price":33.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/mzzmx.jpg?v=1784844836"},{"product_id":"paulaner-spezi-orange-cola-330ml","title":"Paulaner Spezi Orange Cola Soda, 11.15 fl oz (330ml) Can — Since 1974, Germany","description":"\u003cp\u003ePaulaner Spezi is an 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) can of Germany's original orange-cola soda, a non-alcoholic, caffeinated blend of orange lemonade and cola made with real orange and lemon juice concentrate and cane sugar, produced under license in Munich with the same taste and retro design since 1974. It is the genuine German import, available as a single can or in packs of 3, 6, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePaulaner Spezi: Germany's Original Orange-Cola Soda in a 330 mL Can\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrange-cola blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — cola and orange lemonade in one drink, citrusy and slightly tart up front with a cola finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal fruit juice from concentrate\u003c\/strong\u003e — orange juice and lemon juice from concentrate, plus caffeine and natural flavors, per the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSweetened with sugar, no artificial sweeteners\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 calories and 32 g sugar per 330 mL can, per the nutrition panel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-alcoholic and caffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — a soft drink, not a beer, despite the Paulaner name; contains caffeine like a standard cola\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSame recipe and design since 1974\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled under license in Munich, Germany, with the unchanged retro wave can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12 for parties, beer-garden nights at home, and stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice cold straight from the can or poured over ice in a tall glass; a slice of orange or lemon is traditional in Bavarian beer gardens. It pairs naturally with pretzels, bratwurst, schnitzel, and grilled food, and it works as a mixer in place of plain cola. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight, and refrigerate before serving. Once opened, drink the same day, since the carbonation and citrus fade quickly. Check the best-by date printed on the bottom of the can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Paulaner\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePaulaner is a Munich brewery founded in 1634 by Paulaner monks and best known worldwide for its wheat beer and Oktoberfest presence. Since 1974 the company has also produced Spezi, the orange-cola soft drink that originated in Bavaria in the 1950s and became a cult favorite across Germany. Paulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink, sold in cans and bottles in German supermarkets, beer gardens, and cafes. Browse more imported sodas and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.paulaner.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epaulaner.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Paulaner Spezi contain allergens or alcohol?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePaulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink. Its ingredient list is water, sugar, orange and lemon juice from concentrate, carbonated water, caramel color, phosphoric and citric acid, sodium citrate, natural flavors, caffeine, ascorbic acid, and locust bean gum, with no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg listed. Read the printed label on the can for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Paulaner Spezi?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it ice cold, straight from the can or over ice in a tall glass with a slice of orange. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight and chill before serving. Drink an opened can the same day, since the fizz and citrus fade, and check the best-by date on the can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Spezi and a regular cola or orange soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSpezi is a distinct German category that blends cola with orange lemonade, so it tastes citrusy and lightly tart first, then finishes like a cola. It is made with real orange and lemon juice from concentrate and is less sweet than a typical orange soda. Paulaner Spezi is caffeinated like a cola and has kept the same recipe since 1974.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Paulaner Spezi imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Paulaner Spezi is produced under license by Paulaner in Munich, Germany, and this is the original 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) German can, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same drink sold in German supermarkets and beer gardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Paulaner Spezi contain allergens or alcohol?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Paulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink. Its ingredient list is water, sugar, orange and lemon juice from concentrate, carbonated water, caramel color, phosphoric and citric acid, sodium citrate, natural flavors, caffeine, ascorbic acid, and locust bean gum, with no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg listed. Read the printed label on the can for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Paulaner Spezi?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it ice cold, straight from the can or over ice in a tall glass with a slice of orange. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight and chill before serving. Drink an opened can the same day, since the fizz and citrus fade, and check the best-by date on the can.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Spezi and a regular cola or orange soda?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Spezi is a distinct German category that blends cola with orange lemonade, so it tastes citrusy and lightly tart first, then finishes like a cola. It is made with real orange and lemon juice from concentrate and is less sweet than a typical orange soda. Paulaner Spezi is caffeinated like a cola and has kept the same recipe since 1974.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Paulaner Spezi imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Paulaner Spezi is produced under license by Paulaner in Munich, Germany, and this is the original 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) German can, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same drink sold in German supermarkets and beer gardens.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Paulaner","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45715342885055,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45715342917823,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK3","price":13.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45715342950591,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK6","price":25.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45715342983359,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK12","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_c3e8a669-5d72-46f5-b32d-3edeea09f41e.png?v=1781214119"},{"product_id":"almdudler-original-austrian-herbal-soda-500ml","title":"Almdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda, 16.9 fl oz Bottle (500ml)","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda 16.9 fl oz bottle (500ml) — Austria's national drink since 1957, made with a secret blend of natural alpine herbs, lightly carbonated for a crisp, mildly sweet, and refreshingly unique taste. Imported directly from Austria. Available in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAlmdudler Original 16.9 fl oz – Natural Alpine Herbal Soda, Austria's Favorite Since 1957\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAustria's National Drink Since 1957\u003c\/strong\u003e — over 65 years of heritage, the most beloved soft drink in Austria, enjoyed by generations\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural Alpine Herbs\u003c\/strong\u003e — made with a secret blend of natural alpine herbs — no artificial flavors, no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly Carbonated\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentle sparkle that enhances the herbal flavor without overpowering it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile\u003c\/strong\u003e — delicious on its own, as a wine spritzer (Almdudler Spritzer), or as a cocktail mixer with gin or vodka\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Austria\u003c\/strong\u003e — authentic European quality, not available in most US grocery stores\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe Almdudler ice cold for the best experience. Enjoy straight from the bottle or pour over ice. For the classic Almdudler Spritzer, mix 50\/50 with dry white wine — Austria's favorite summer drink. Also great mixed with sparkling water (G'spritzter) for a lighter option, or as a cocktail mixer with gin, vodka, or elderflower liqueur. Store at room temperature; refrigerate after opening and consume within 24 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Almdudler\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler was created in 1957 by Erwin Klein in Vienna, Austria — inspired by the alpine herb lemonades traditionally enjoyed in the Austrian mountains. The name combines \"Alm\" (alpine meadow) and \"dudeln\" (to yodel) — a playful nod to Austrian mountain culture. Today, Almdudler is Austria's most beloved soft drink, exported to over 40 countries and cherished by Austrians at home and abroad.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eWhat does Almdudler taste like?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eAlmdudler Original has a unique, mildly sweet herbal flavor with light carbonation — crisp, refreshing, and unlike any other soda. The secret blend of alpine herbs gives it a distinctive taste that is both nostalgic for Austrians and excitingly new for first-time drinkers.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eIs Almdudler made with artificial flavors or colors?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eNo — Almdudler Original is made with natural alpine herb flavoring and contains no artificial colors or flavors. It is naturally flavored and lightly carbonated.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003eHow do Austrians traditionally drink Almdudler?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eThe most popular way is ice cold, straight from the bottle. A classic Austrian favorite is the Almdudler Spritzer — mixed 50\/50 with dry white wine — especially popular in summer. It is also enjoyed mixed with sparkling water or as a cocktail mixer with gin or vodka.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExplore more imported beverages in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/beverages\"\u003eBeverages collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.almdudler.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003ealmdudler.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What does Almdudler taste like?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Almdudler Original has a unique, mildly sweet herbal flavor with light carbonation — crisp, refreshing, and unlike any other soda. The secret blend of alpine herbs gives it a distinctive taste that is both nostalgic for Austrians and excitingly new for first-time drinkers.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Almdudler made with artificial flavors or colors?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No — Almdudler Original is made with natural alpine herb flavoring and contains no artificial colors or flavors. It is naturally flavored and lightly carbonated.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do Austrians traditionally drink Almdudler?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The most popular way is ice cold, straight from the bottle. A classic Austrian favorite is the Almdudler Spritzer — mixed 50\/50 with dry white wine — especially popular in summer. It is also enjoyed mixed with sparkling water or as a cocktail mixer with gin or vodka.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Almdudler","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45621361672383,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-SINGLE","price":5.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45621361705151,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-PACK3","price":16.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45621361737919,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-PACK6","price":30.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_ef8ebfb8-ce3f-4055-b236-a4749a663ad0.png?v=1778970576"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-pistachios-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened, Only 3 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of pistachio milk made from only three ingredients: filtered water, pistachios, and Himalayan pink salt. It has no added sugar, oils, or gums and provides 3 g of plant protein per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened: Three-Ingredient Pistachio Milk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 3 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, pistachios, and Himalayan pink salt; no gums, oils, or emulsifiers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1 g naturally occurring sugar and 80 calories per 8 fl oz serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 g plant protein per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — from whole pistachios, with biotin at 20 percent, vitamin B6 at 15 percent, and thiamin at 10 percent of the daily value\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, pale green plant milk with a mild nutty flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and pour into espresso for a pistachio latte, over cereal, or into smoothies with banana or berries. Its neutral, slightly savory profile also works in soups, pasta sauces, and baking where you want body without sweetness. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Milked Pistachios and Vanilla Milked Pistachios?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth share the same pistachio base, 32 fl oz carton, 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving, and both are unsweetened. The plain version has just water, pistachios, and salt, so it is neutral enough for savory cooking. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract for lattes and breakfast bowls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Milked Pistachios and Vanilla Milked Pistachios?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both share the same pistachio base, 32 fl oz carton, 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving, and both are unsweetened. The plain version has just water, pistachios, and salt, so it is neutral enough for savory cooking. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract for lattes and breakfast bowls.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45743199092927,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743199125695,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-PK3","price":27.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743199158463,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-PK6","price":51.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/pis1.png?v=1778966848"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-almonds-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened, Only 2 Ingredients, 4x More Almonds, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of almond milk made from only two ingredients: filtered water and almonds. It uses up to four times more almonds per serving than leading brands, giving 5 g of plant protein with no added sugar, gums, or oils. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened: Two-Ingredient Almond Milk with 5 g Protein\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 2 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water and almonds; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 4x more almonds\u003c\/strong\u003e — more nuts per serving than typical almond milks, which is where the 5 g of protein comes from\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0 g added sugar; the richness comes from the almonds, not sweeteners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean, mild almond flavor that suits cereal, coffee, and cooking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per recyclable carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton well and pour over cereal or granola, blend into smoothies, or use as a one-to-one milk replacement in pancakes, muffins, and cream soups. It works in hot coffee and tea; for a foamed latte, heat it gently and froth. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the almond solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow is Elmhurst almond milk different from regular almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eTypical almond milks contain about two percent almonds plus water, sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins, and deliver around 1 g of protein. Elmhurst uses only water and almonds at a higher nut concentration, so a serving has 5 g of protein and a creamier body without any gums or oils.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the almond solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How is Elmhurst almond milk different from regular almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Typical almond milks contain about two percent almonds plus water, sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins, and deliver around 1 g of protein. Elmhurst uses only water and almonds at a higher nut concentration, so a serving has 5 g of protein and a creamier body without any gums or oils.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45524489765055,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743724069055,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743724101823,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Elmunalmmilk.webp?v=1781805063"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-oats-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened, Only 3 Ingredients, 25g Whole Grain\/Serving, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of oat milk made from only three ingredients: filtered water, whole grain oats, and salt. It has no added sugar, gums, or oils and delivers 25 g of whole grain per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened: Three-Ingredient Whole Grain Oat Milk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 3 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, whole grain oats, and salt; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e25 g whole grain per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — about half the recommended daily whole grain intake in one 8 fl oz glass, with 3 g plant protein\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 1 g of sugar per serving occurs naturally in the oats; 100 calories per 8 fl oz serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a plant-based milk with a mild, naturally sweet oat flavor that works hot or cold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four servings per carton in a recyclable FSC-certified carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton well, then pour over cereal, blend into smoothies, or stir into oatmeal and pancake batter. It works in hot coffee and tea and is a common choice for oat lattes, though it is not a dedicated barista blend, so foam is lighter than with the Elmhurst barista creamers. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; after opening, refrigerate and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt contains oats, which are a gluten-containing grain in the United States unless certified gluten-free, and this product is not certified gluten-free, so it is not suitable for celiac disease or gluten sensitivity. It contains no dairy, nuts, or soy ingredients. Read the printed label for the current facility statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oats in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Elmhurst Milked Oats and other oat milks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMost oat milks list eight or more ingredients, including rapeseed or sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins. Elmhurst Milked Oats uses only water, whole grain oats, and salt, so the texture comes from the oats themselves. It has more whole grain per serving and a cleaner, less oily mouthfeel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It contains oats, which are a gluten-containing grain in the United States unless certified gluten-free, and this product is not certified gluten-free, so it is not suitable for celiac disease or gluten sensitivity. It contains no dairy, nuts, or soy ingredients. Read the printed label for the current facility statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oats in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Elmhurst Milked Oats and other oat milks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Most oat milks list eight or more ingredients, including rapeseed or sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins. Elmhurst Milked Oats uses only water, whole grain oats, and salt, so the texture comes from the oats themselves. It has more whole grain per serving and a cleaner, less oily mouthfeel.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45524541997247,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743721021631,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743721054399,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/oatn.png?v=1779549143"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-walnuts-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened, Only 2 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of walnut milk made from only two ingredients: filtered water and walnuts. It has no added sugar, gums, or oils, and each serving provides 1400 mg of omega-3 ALA from the walnuts themselves. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened: Two-Ingredient Walnut Milk Rich in Omega-3 ALA\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 2 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water and walnuts; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOmega-3 ALA from walnuts\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1400 mg of ALA per 8 fl oz serving, about 87 percent of the daily value, plus 3 g plant protein\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0 g sugar and 120 calories per 8 fl oz serving; the richness comes from walnut fat, not sweeteners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher\u003c\/strong\u003e — a mild, nutty plant-based milk with an earthy walnut finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four servings per carton in a recyclable FSC-certified carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and pour into dark roast coffee, overnight oats, or a banana smoothie, where the walnut flavor pairs well with cocoa, cinnamon, and maple. It also works as the liquid in muffin and pancake batter. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; after opening, refrigerate and use within 7 to 10 days, shaking before each pour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains walnuts, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the walnut solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Elmhurst walnut milk taste like compared to almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWalnut milk is richer and a little earthier than almond milk, with a soft, buttery body from the walnut fat and a mild, slightly toasty finish. Elmhurst Milked Almonds is lighter and more neutral. Walnut is the better match for coffee, cocoa, and oatmeal; almond suits cereal and lighter smoothies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains walnuts, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the walnut solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Elmhurst walnut milk taste like compared to almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Walnut milk is richer and a little earthier than almond milk, with a soft, buttery body from the walnut fat and a mild, slightly toasty finish. Elmhurst Milked Almonds is lighter and more neutral. Walnut is the better match for coffee, cocoa, and oatmeal; almond suits cereal and lighter smoothies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45613499056319,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743684059327,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743684092095,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/walnut.png?v=1778966910"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-oat-creamer-chai-spice-16oz","title":"Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice, Naturally Flavored, Dairy Free, Gluten Free, 16 fl oz (473ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is a 16 fl oz (473 mL) shelf-stable carton of dairy-free coffee creamer made from whole grain oats and naturally flavored with warm chai spices. Each tablespoon has 15 calories and 1 g of sugar, with no added gums or oils. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice: Dairy-Free Chai Coffee Creamer Made from Oats\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChai spice flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — naturally flavored with warming notes of cinnamon, cardamom, ginger, and clove\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15 calories, 1 g sugar per tablespoon\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightly sweetened so the spice, not the sugar, leads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added gums or oils\u003c\/strong\u003e — made from whole grain oats with the HydroRelease method; no gellan, carrageenan, or sunflower oil\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, gluten-free, vegan, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — suitable for most plant-based and gluten-free diets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFroths and steams\u003c\/strong\u003e — designed to blend into hot and iced coffee and to foam for lattes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 fl oz (473 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — available as a Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton, then add a tablespoon or two to hot coffee, espresso, cold brew, or black tea for a quick chai latte effect. It froths for a foam topping and pours well over ice. It also works in matcha and in warm oatmeal. Keep the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made from oats that Elmhurst labels gluten-free, and it contains no dairy, soy, or tree nut ingredients, so it suits most dairy-free and gluten-free diets. Natural chai flavoring is used. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oat solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow is Elmhurst Chai Spice creamer different from Elmhurst Milked Oats?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMilked Oats is a plain, unsweetened oat milk sold in a 32 fl oz carton for cereal, smoothies, and cooking. The Chai Spice creamer is a concentrated 16 fl oz product meant to be added by the tablespoon to coffee or tea; it is lightly sweetened, flavored with chai spices, and formulated to froth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 16 fl oz (473 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It is made from oats that Elmhurst labels gluten-free, and it contains no dairy, soy, or tree nut ingredients, so it suits most dairy-free and gluten-free diets. Natural chai flavoring is used. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oat solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How is Elmhurst Chai Spice creamer different from Elmhurst Milked Oats?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Milked Oats is a plain, unsweetened oat milk sold in a 32 fl oz carton for cereal, smoothies, and cooking. The Chai Spice creamer is a concentrated 16 fl oz product meant to be added by the tablespoon to coffee or tea; it is lightly sweetened, flavored with chai spices, and formulated to froth.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 16 fl oz (473 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45524565164223,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743439151295,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743439184063,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/ac.png?v=1778966916"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-vanilla-milked-pistachios-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened, Only 4 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of pistachio milk made from four ingredients: filtered water, pistachios, real vanilla extract, and Himalayan pink salt. It has no added sugar, oils, or gums and 3 g of plant protein per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios: Unsweetened Pistachio Milk with Real Vanilla\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 4 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, pistachios, vanilla extract, and Himalayan pink salt; no gums, oils, or emulsifiers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal vanilla extract, no sweetener\u003c\/strong\u003e — vanilla adds aroma while the carton stays unsweetened at 1 g naturally occurring sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e80 calories, 3 g protein per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — from whole pistachios, with biotin at 20 percent and vitamin B6 at 10 percent of the daily value\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, pale green plant milk with a soft nutty finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and use it where vanilla and pistachio belong: in lattes and cappuccinos, over granola, in a smoothie with banana and dates, or as the milk in pancake and muffin batter. It froths for coffee and pours well over iced drinks. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Vanilla Milked Pistachios and plain Milked Pistachios?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth are unsweetened pistachio milks with the same 32 fl oz carton, the same 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract, which gives a dessert-like aroma without sugar, making it the better pick for lattes, granola, and smoothies. Plain is more neutral for cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Vanilla Milked Pistachios and plain Milked Pistachios?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both are unsweetened pistachio milks with the same 32 fl oz carton, the same 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract, which gives a dessert-like aroma without sugar, making it the better pick for lattes, granola, and smoothies. Plain is more neutral for cooking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45524550058175,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-SINGLE","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 6","offer_id":45524550025407,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-PACK3","price":27.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743228846271,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-PACK6","price":51.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Yeni_Proje_8_a5373889-72c8-45a3-a7df-1bab0d882b2a.jpg?v=1779114993"},{"product_id":"bragg-organic-apple-cider-vinegar-citrus-ginger-blend-with-the-mother-16-fl-oz-raw-and-unfiltered","title":"Bragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend with the Mother - 16 fl oz - Raw and Unfiltered","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eBragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend — 16 fl oz. A refreshing, functional wellness drink crafted from raw, unfiltered ACV with the Mother, combined with organic lemon, lime, and ginger. 750mg of acetic acid per serving. USDA Organic, Non-GMO Project Verified, and Kosher.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend 16 fl oz – Raw \u0026amp; Unfiltered with the Mother\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRaw \u0026amp; unfiltered ACV with the Mother\u003c\/strong\u003e — naturally fermented, 750mg acetic acid per serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCitrus \u0026amp; ginger blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — organic lemon, lime, and ginger for a zesty, invigorating flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUSDA Organic\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced with 100% organic apples, no added color or processed sugars\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-GMO Project Verified \u0026amp; Kosher\u003c\/strong\u003e — clean, trusted certification\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile\u003c\/strong\u003e — for drinks, smoothies, salad dressings, sauces, and marinades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd 2 tablespoons to 8 oz of water as a daily wellness drink. Mix into smoothies for a tangy boost. Use in salad dressings, marinades, slaws, and sauces. Shake before each use — the Mother naturally settles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Bragg\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBragg has been a pioneer in natural health foods since 1912. Their Apple Cider Vinegar products are made from organic apples and naturally fermented to preserve the Mother — a hallmark of quality raw, unfiltered ACV.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is 'the Mother' in Bragg Apple Cider Vinegar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe Mother is a colony of beneficial bacteria, enzymes, and proteins that forms naturally during fermentation — it gives Bragg ACV its cloudy appearance and is a sign of raw, unfiltered quality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAdd 2 tablespoons to 8 oz of water as a daily wellness drink, or use in smoothies, dressings, sauces, and marinades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend organic?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes — USDA Organic, Non-GMO Project Verified, and Kosher certified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more pantry staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/pantry\"\u003ePantry collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLearn more about Bragg at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.bragg.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003ebragg.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is 'the Mother' in Bragg Apple Cider Vinegar?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The Mother is a colony of beneficial bacteria, enzymes, and proteins that forms naturally during fermentation. It gives Bragg ACV its characteristic cloudy appearance and is a sign of raw, unfiltered, unpasteurized apple cider vinegar.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I use Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Add 2 tablespoons to 8 oz of water as a daily wellness drink. Also great in smoothies, salad dressings, sauces, slaws, and marinades.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend organic?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Bragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend is USDA Organic, Non-GMO Project Verified, and Kosher certified.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Bragg","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44729433784511,"sku":"BRAGG-ACV-CITRUS-GINGER-16OZ","price":8.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_d4c57d60-4569-4759-8c81-fb89b6d44b6d.jpg?v=1778967030"},{"product_id":"polar-club-soda-33-8-fl-oz-1-liter-bottles","title":"Polar Club Soda, Crisp \u0026 Refreshing Sparkling Water, 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) Bottles","description":"\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Club Soda 33.8 fl oz (1L) — clean, crisp, and perfectly carbonated. Zero calories, zero sweeteners, zero sodium. The ideal mixer for cocktails and mocktails, or a refreshing standalone sparkling water. Made by Polar Beverages, crafting premium sparkling water since 1882.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCrisp, clean carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — fine, persistent bubbles and smooth neutral taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sweeteners, zero sodium\u003c\/strong\u003e — pure sparkling water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePerfect mixer\u003c\/strong\u003e — classic club soda for cocktails, mocktails, and spritzers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles\u003c\/strong\u003e — ideal for home bar, entertaining, and family use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in USA\u003c\/strong\u003e — crafted by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts since 1882\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Perfect Mixer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Club Soda is the bartender’s choice — clean, neutral carbonation that enhances without overpowering. Use it for classic highballs, gin \u0026amp; tonics, whiskey sodas, vodka sodas, Aperol spritzes, and any cocktail that calls for club soda. For mocktails, mix with fresh citrus juice, herbs, and a splash of syrup. Or simply enjoy over ice with a squeeze of lemon or lime.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Polar Beverages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSince 1882, Polar Beverages has been crafting premium sparkling waters from the pure spring waters of New England. Polar Club Soda is the cornerstone of that tradition — clean, crisp, and perfectly carbonated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between club soda and sparkling water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eClub soda has added minerals giving it slightly more complexity. Polar Club Soda has zero sodium — one of the cleanest club sodas available.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Polar Club Soda keto-friendly?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — zero calories, zero carbohydrates, zero sweeteners. Fully keto-friendly.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use it as a cocktail mixer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes. Clean, neutral carbonation that enhances without overpowering — perfect for highballs, sodas, and spritzes.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between club soda and sparkling water?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Club soda is carbonated water with added minerals (sodium bicarbonate or potassium sulfate) giving it a slightly more complex taste. Polar Club Soda has zero sodium, making it one of the cleanest club sodas available.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Polar Club Soda keto-friendly?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — Polar Club Soda is zero calories, zero carbohydrates, and zero sweeteners, making it fully keto-friendly.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use Polar Club Soda as a cocktail mixer?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Polar Club Soda is the classic club soda for cocktails and mocktails — clean, neutral carbonation that enhances without overpowering. Perfect for highballs, whiskey sodas, vodka sodas, and Aperol spritzes.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Célibataire","offer_id":45553473323199,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 3","offer_id":45553473355967,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-PACK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Paquet de 6","offer_id":45553473388735,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-PACK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/clubsoda1.jpg?v=1778967044"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-tonic-water-33-8-fl-oz-1l","title":"Polar Diet Tonic Water 33.8 fl oz (1L) | Zero Calorie Mixer","description":"\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water 33.8 fl oz (1L) delivers a crisp, classic tonic experience with zero calories and zero sugar — balanced quinine bitterness, bright carbonation, and clean natural flavors. The go-to diet tonic for gin \u0026amp; tonic lovers, mocktail makers, and anyone who wants a lighter pour without sacrificing taste. Made in the USA by Polar Beverages since 1882.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose Polar Diet Tonic Water?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sugar:\u003c\/strong\u003e All the crisp tonic flavor — none of the calories. Perfect for keto, low-carb, and calorie-conscious lifestyles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClassic quinine flavor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Balanced bitter quinine notes with bright, clean carbonation — the hallmark of a great tonic water.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePerfect cocktail mixer:\u003c\/strong\u003e The ideal base for gin \u0026amp; tonic, vodka tonic, mocktails, and premium drink recipes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLarge 33.8 fl oz (1L) bottle:\u003c\/strong\u003e More value per bottle — great for home bars, entertaining, and everyday refreshment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in the USA:\u003c\/strong\u003e Crafted by Polar Beverages, one of America’s most trusted independent beverage makers since 1882.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProduct Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct:\u003c\/strong\u003e Polar Diet Tonic Water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNet Volume:\u003c\/strong\u003e 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) per bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCalories:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0 per serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSugar:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0g\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlavor:\u003c\/strong\u003e Classic Tonic with Quinine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePackaging:\u003c\/strong\u003e PET plastic bottle with resealable cap\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand:\u003c\/strong\u003e Polar Beverages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCountry of Origin:\u003c\/strong\u003e USA\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Enjoy\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe well chilled over ice. Mix 1 part gin (or vodka) with 2 parts Polar Diet Tonic Water for a classic low-calorie G\u0026amp;T. Add a squeeze of lime or lemon for a bright finish. Also excellent on its own as a refreshing zero-calorie sparkling drink. Refrigerate after opening and consume within 3–4 days for best carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Polar Beverages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFounded in 1882 in Worcester, Massachusetts, Polar Beverages is one of America’s oldest and most respected independent beverage companies. Known for their premium sparkling waters, seltzers, and mixers, Polar has been crafting clean, crisp beverages for over 140 years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Polar Diet Tonic Water truly calorie-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — zero calories and zero sugar per serving.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs it keto-friendly?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — zero sugar and zero calories fit keto, low-carb, and calorie-conscious diets.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow long does it stay fresh after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eRefrigerate after opening and consume within 3–4 days for best carbonation.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I use it in mocktails?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eAbsolutely — crisp quinine flavor makes it an excellent base for mocktails, sparkling lemonades, and flavored spritzers.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse our full \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/beverages\"\u003eBeverages collection\u003c\/a\u003e for more premium mixers and sparkling waters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Polar Diet Tonic Water truly calorie-free?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — Polar Diet Tonic Water contains zero calories and zero sugar per serving.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Polar Diet Tonic Water keto-friendly?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — with zero sugar and zero calories, it fits keto, low-carb, and calorie-conscious diets.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How long does Polar Diet Tonic Water stay fresh after opening?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Refrigerate after opening and consume within 3-4 days for best carbonation and flavor.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use Polar Diet Tonic Water in mocktails?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely — its crisp quinine flavor makes it an excellent base for non-alcoholic mocktails, sparkling lemonades, and flavored spritzers.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45655780851903,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45655780884671,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-PACK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45655780917439,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-PACK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/240.jpg?v=1778967073"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-tonic-water-lime-33-8-fl-oz","title":"Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime, Zero Calorie, 33.8 fl oz","description":"\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water with Lime — 33.8 fl oz (1 liter). Zero calorie, crisp quinine bitterness with bright lime citrus flavor. The perfect guilt-free sparkling mixer for gin \u0026amp; tonics, vodka tonics, and premium cocktails. Made by Polar Beverages, crafting premium sparkling beverages since 1882.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — all the tonic flavor, none of the guilt\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBright lime flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — refreshing citrus twist on classic tonic water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalanced quinine bitterness\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, clean finish perfect for mixing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePremium cocktail mixer\u003c\/strong\u003e — ideal for gin \u0026amp; tonic, vodka tonic, and mocktails\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — generous 1 liter format for home bar and entertaining\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolar Beverages quality\u003c\/strong\u003e — premium sparkling drinks crafted since 1882\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Perfect Diet Mixer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse for classic gin \u0026amp; tonics, vodka tonics, rum tonics, and any cocktail calling for tonic water. The bright lime flavor adds a natural citrus note that pairs beautifully with gin botanicals and vodka. For mocktails, mix with fresh lime juice, mint, and a splash of elderflower for a sophisticated zero-calorie sparkling drink.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Polar Beverages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFounded in 1882 in Worcester, Massachusetts, Polar Beverages is one of America’s oldest and most trusted sparkling water and soda brands. Every bottle is crafted with pure New England water and a commitment to quality that has stood for over 140 years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime contain quinine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes — classic bitter tonic flavor, ideal for gin \u0026amp; tonics and other tonic-based cocktails.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I drink it on its own?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eAbsolutely — delicious over ice with a lime wedge. Refreshing zero-calorie sparkling drink even without spirits.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime contain quinine?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime contains quinine, giving it the classic bitter tonic flavor that makes it the ideal mixer for gin and tonics and other tonic-based cocktails.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I drink Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime on its own?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Absolutely. Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime is delicious on its own over ice with a lime wedge. The balanced quinine bitterness and bright lime flavor make it a refreshing zero-calorie sparkling drink even without spirits.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45686109012159,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45686109044927,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-PK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45686109077695,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-PK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/toniclime1.jpg?v=1778967049"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-ginger-ale-soda-33-8-fl-oz-1-liter-zero-calorie-crisp-refreshing-ginger-flavor-pack-of-4","title":"Polar Diet Ginger Ale 33.8 fl oz (1L) – Zero Sugar","description":"\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolar Diet Ginger Ale 33.8 fl oz (1L)\u003c\/strong\u003e is a zero-sugar, zero-calorie carbonated soft drink with a crisp ginger flavor from Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts. Choose the pack size that fits your pantry, gathering, or beverage-mixing needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Diet Ginger Ale 33.8 fl oz (1L) – Zero Sugar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eZero sugar and zero calories — a lighter alternative to regular ginger ale\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCrisp, refreshing ginger flavor with lively carbonation\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 liter) bottle — convenient for sharing or keeping chilled at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWorks as a standalone soda, alcohol-free drink base, or cocktail mixer\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eResealable bottle helps preserve carbonation between servings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe well chilled or pour over ice. Use it in mocktails and mixed drinks that call for ginger ale. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place; refrigerate after opening, keep tightly capped, and enjoy promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages is a family-owned beverage company based in Worcester, Massachusetts, with roots dating to 1882. The company produces sparkling waters, mixers, sodas, and other carbonated beverages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Polar Diet Ginger Ale sugar-free and calorie-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Polar Diet Ginger Ale is labeled zero sugar and zero calories while retaining a crisp ginger ale profile. It is a carbonated soft drink intended for chilled serving, with a lighter alternative to regular ginger ale for customers who prefer beverages without sugar or calories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere can I verify the ingredients and allergen information?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eReview the ingredient and allergen statements printed on the bottle you receive, because packaging and formulas can change. If you have a food allergy, sensitivity, or dietary restriction, confirm the current label before drinking and contact Polar Beverages directly when additional clarification is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve Polar Diet Ginger Ale?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChill the bottle thoroughly, then serve Polar Diet Ginger Ale on its own or over ice. Its crisp ginger flavor also works in alcohol-free drinks and classic mixed beverages. Refrigerate after opening, keep the cap tightly closed, and enjoy promptly for the best carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThis listing lets you choose a Single bottle, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6. Every bottle contains 33.8 fl oz (1 liter). Select the pack size from the product options before adding the item to your cart so the quantity matches your needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrowse more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/fr\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more about the brand at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/polarmixers.com\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\"\u003ePolar Mixers\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is Polar Diet Ginger Ale sugar-free and calorie-free?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Polar Diet Ginger Ale is labeled zero sugar and zero calories while retaining a crisp ginger ale profile. It is a carbonated soft drink intended for chilled serving, with a lighter alternative to regular ginger ale for customers who prefer beverages without sugar or calories.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Where can I verify the ingredients and allergen information?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Review the ingredient and allergen statements printed on the bottle you receive, because packaging and formulas can change. If you have a food allergy, sensitivity, or dietary restriction, confirm the current label before drinking and contact Polar Beverages directly when additional clarification is needed.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How should I serve Polar Diet Ginger Ale?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Chill the bottle thoroughly, then serve Polar Diet Ginger Ale on its own or over ice. Its crisp ginger flavor also works in alcohol-free drinks and classic mixed beverages. Refrigerate after opening, keep the cap tightly closed, and enjoy promptly for the best carbonation.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Which pack sizes are available?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"This listing lets you choose a Single bottle, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6. Every bottle contains 33.8 fl oz (1 liter). Select the pack size from the product options before adding the item to your cart so the quantity matches your needs.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45870670708927,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45870670741695,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-PK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45870670774463,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-PK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/polar-diet-ginger-ale-1-liter-single_d0c838f5-0c9a-488a-a13e-b41ba3b170d1.png?v=1784393154"},{"product_id":"starbucks-veranda-blend-coffee-k-cup-pods-blonde-roast-smooth-mellow-flavor-72-count","title":"Starbucks Veranda Blend Coffee K-Cup Pods, Blonde Roast, Smooth \u0026 Mellow Flavor, 72 Count","description":"\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Veranda Blend Blonde Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods — 72 count. A light, smooth, and mellow cup crafted for those who prefer a lighter roast. 100% Arabica beans. Compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewers. 72 pods — enough for weeks of daily brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBlonde Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — light, smooth, mellow, and approachable; Starbucks' lightest roast\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% Arabica beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — carefully selected for lighter roasting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup Pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — large count for weeks of daily brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — works with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConsistent quality\u003c\/strong\u003e — same Starbucks flavor you expect, brewed at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eServing Suggestions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrew as a classic black coffee to appreciate the clean, light flavor. Add a splash of cream or oat milk for a soft latte-style cup. Brew over ice for a refreshing iced coffee. Use as a base for cold brew-style preparations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAbout Starbucks Veranda Blend\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Veranda Blend is the hallmark of Starbucks Blonde Roast — a lightly roasted, Latin American coffee with a smooth, mellow body and subtle sweetness. Each K-Cup Pod delivers the same quality and consistency as the coffee you enjoy at your local Starbucks cafe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdl\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre these K-Cup Pods compatible with all Keurig machines?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eYes. Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup Pods are compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003cdt\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat roast level is Starbucks Veranda Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/dt\u003e\n\u003cdd\u003eBlonde Roast — Starbucks' lightest roast. Light, smooth, mellow, and approachable.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Are Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup Pods compatible with all Keurig machines?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup Pods are compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewing systems.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What roast level is Starbucks Veranda Blend?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Starbucks Veranda Blend is a Blonde Roast — the lightest roast offered by Starbucks. It delivers a light, smooth, mellow, and approachable cup, perfect for those who prefer a gentler coffee flavor.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44857510723775,"sku":"STARBUCKS-VERANDA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/S1_66a60ea6-3e98-4673-8b7e-642be4656d0c.jpg?v=1778967118"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/collections\/icelandic_square.jpg?v=1783091777","url":"https:\/\/realprimedeals.com\/fr\/collections\/drink-collection.oembed?page=18","provider":"Real Prime Deals","version":"1.0","type":"link"}